| all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
USER GUIDE | Users Manual | 3.35 MiB | October 11 2011 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Users Guide | Users Manual | 2.07 MiB | March 11 2014 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 14.78 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
EME-PCII Test Report 1 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.01 MiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
EME-PCII Test Report 2 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.02 MiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Frequency Justification Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 114.30 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 39.62 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
|
Statement of Certification Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 441.46 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Attestation Statements | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Attestation Statements | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | March 11 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Attestation Statements | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Internal Photos | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | October 11 2011 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | October 11 2011 |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | USER GUIDE | Users Manual | 3.35 MiB | October 11 2011 |
APX 4000 User Guide Model 3 68012004058-A m ASTRO APX 4000 Series Digital Portable Radios Quick Reference Card Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance
!
C a u t i o n Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio (Motorola Publication part number 68012004065) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. Radio Controls Antenna Accessory Connector Multi Function Knob
(MFK)*:
Primary Feature:
_________________ Secondary Feature:
_________________ Microphone Top Lightbar Indicator Microphone Top Side (Select) Button __________ PTT Button Side Button 1 __________ Side Button 2 __________ Home Button Keypad Top (Orange) Button ___________ LED Bluetooth Pairing Indicator Main Speaker Main Display Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button 4-Way Navigation Button Radio On/Off On Press and hold the MFK until the display lights up. Off Press and hold the MFK until you see Power off?, then press Menu Select button below Yes. Battery Zones and Channels Zone Zone scroll to desired zone. Channel Channel scroll to desired channel. 2011 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 10/11 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A. Receiving and Transmitting 1 Select zone/channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. OR Press and hold Volume Set button. OR Press Monitor button and listen for activity. 3 Adjust volume, if necessary. 4 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive. Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press and hold the Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone/channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone, and the LED blinks momentary red. 3 When acknowledgment is received, you hear four beeps; alarm ends; and radio exits emergency.
* Default emergency button press timer is set to 1 second. This timer is programmable, see page 66 in the user guide for details. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button.
*PMLN6070A*
PMLN6070A English Sending an Emergency Call 1 Press the Emergency button. 2 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to end call. 4 Press and hold Emergency button to exit emergency. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Call 1 Press the Emergency button. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. 3 Silent emergency continues until you:
Press and hold the Emergency button to exit emergency state. OR Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Display Status Icons u t Receiving a call or data. Transmitting a call or data. English 8 v O M HOR . i j Blinks when the battery is low. The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site
(trunking only). Direct radio to radio communication or connected through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater This channel is being monitored. L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-Two Channel during scan. Menu Navigation
< or > to Menu Entry.
{, |, or } directly below Menu Entry to select. H to exit. k m l G n o b a The vote scan feature is enabled. On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = Location feature enabled, and location signal available. Off = Location feature disabled. Blinking = Location feature enabled, but location signal unavailable. On = User is currently associated with Off = User is currently not associated the radio. with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. Bluetooth is ready. Bluetooth is connected to the device. U or D to scroll through sub-list.
{, |, or } directly below Menu Entry to select. Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303, East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: APX 4000 conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y i English Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D ii English Contents This User Guide contains all the information you need to use the APX 4000 Series Digital Portable Radios. Declaration of Conformity . i Important Safety Information . ix Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . ix Software Version . ix Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) . ix Informations importantes sur la scurit . x Scurit du produit et respect des lignes directrices concernant l'exposition l'nergie RF . x Version du logiciel . x Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) . x Computer Software Copyrights . xi Documentation Copyrights . xi C o n t e n t s Disclaimer . xi Getting Started . 1 How to Use This Guide . 1 Notations Used in This Manual . 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . 2 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) . 2 CrossTalk Prevention . 3 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) . 3 SecureNet . 3 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . 3 Preparing Your Radio for Use . 4 Charging the Battery . 4 Battery Charger . 4 Attaching the Battery . 5 Attaching the Antenna . 6 Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover . 6 Attaching the Belt Clip . 7 Turning On the Radio . 7 Adjusting the Volume . 9 iii English Identifying Radio Controls . 9 Radio Parts and Controls . 10 Programmable Features . 11 Assignable Radio Functions . 11 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . 13 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . 14 Using the Menu Select Buttons . 14 Using the Navigation Buttons . 14 Home Button . 14 Data Feature Button . 14 4-Way Navigation Button . 14 Multi Function Knob (MFK) . 15 Using the Keypad . 16 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . 16 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . 17 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . 18 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . 19 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . 20 Identifying Status Indicators . 20 Status Icons . 21 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . 23 Status Icons . 23 TMS Menu Options . 25 Call Type Icons . 25 Top Lightbar and LED Indicators . 26 LED Indications . 27 Top Lightbar Indiations . 27 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . 28 Alert Tones . 29 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts . 33 General Radio Operation . 34 Selecting a Zone . 34 Selecting a Radio Channel . 35 Using Channel Search Button . 36 Using Mode Select Feature . 37 Saving a Zone and Channel to a Softkey . 38 Saving a Zone and Channel to a Keypad Button . 38 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . 39 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call . 39 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
(Trunking Only) . 40 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call
(Trunking Only) . 41 Making a Radio Call . 41 Making a Talkgroup Call . 41 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) . 42 s t n e t n o C iv English Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only) .43 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) . 44 Repeater or Direct Operation . 45 Monitoring Features . 45 Monitoring a Channel . 46 Conventional Mode Operation . 46 Advanced Features . 47 Advanced Call Features . 47 Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 47 Receiving a Selective Call . 47 Making a Selective Call . 48 Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) . 48 Selecting a Talkgroup . 48 Sending a Status Call . 49 Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) . 50 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) . 50 Classifying Regrouped Radios . 51 Contacts . 51 Making a Private Call from Contacts . 52 Adding a New Contact Entry . 53 Deleting a Contact Entry . 55 Adding a Contact to a Call List . 55 Removing a Contact from a Call List . 56 Editing a Contact in a Call List . 56 Editing an Entry Alias . 56 Editing as Entry ID . 57 Editing a Call Type . 58 Viewing Details of a Contact . 58 Scan Lists . 59 Viewing a Scan List . 59 Editing the Scan List . 59 Changing the Scan List Status . 60 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status . 61 Scan . 61 Turning Scan On or Off . 61 Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) . 62 Deleting a Nuisance Channel . 62 Restoring a Nuisance Channel . 63 Call Alert Paging . 63 Receiving a Call Alert Page . 63 Sending a Call Alert Page . 64 Emergency Operation . 65 Sending an Emergency Alarm . 66 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) . 66 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call . 67 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm . 67 C o n t e n t s v English Using the Emergency Keep-Alive Feature . 68 Man Down . 68 Pre-Alert Timer . 69 Post-Alert Timer . 70 Alerting User When Man Down Feature is Triggered . 70 Triggering Emergency . 70 Exiting Man Down Feature . 71 Re-Initiating Man Down . 71 Testing the Man Down Feature . 72 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . 73 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode . 73 Accessing the User Login Feature . 74 Logging In as a User . 74 Logging Out . 75 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . 76 Accessing the TMS Features . 76 Composing and Sending a New Text Message . 77 Sending a Quick Text Message . 78 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features . 80 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message . 80 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message . 80 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message . 80 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message 81 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message . 81 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message . 81 Managing Text Messages . 82 Receiving a Text Message . 82 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . 82 Replying to a Received Text Message . 83 Accessing the Drafts Folder . 84 Managing Sent Text Messages . 84 Viewing a Sent Text Message . 84 Sending a Sent Text Message . 85 Deleting a Text Message . 86 Deleting All Text Messages . 86 Secure Operations . 87 Selecting Secure Transmissions . 87 Selecting Clear Transmissions . 87 Managing Encryption . 87 Loading an Encryption Key . 87 Using the Multikey Feature . 88 Selecting an Encryption Key . 88 Selecting a Keyset . 89 Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys . 89 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 90 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page . 91 Hear Clear . 91 Security . 92 s t n e t n o C vi English Radio Lock . 92 Unlocking Your Radio . 92 Changing Your Password . 92 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature
(Secure Radios Only) . 93 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . 93 Understanding the GPS Feature . 93 Enhancing GPS Performance . 94 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) . 94 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature . 95 Saving a Waypoint . 96 Viewing a Saved Waypoint . 97 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint . 98 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint . 99 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint . 100 Deleting All Saved Waypoints . 100 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint . 101 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode . 101 Trunking System Controls . 102 Using the Failsoft System . 102 Going Out of Range . 102 Using the Site Trunking Feature . 102 Locking and Unlocking a Site . 103 Viewing and Changing a Site . 103 Viewing the Current Site . 103 Changing the Current Site . 103 Mission Critical Wireless
- Bluetooth - . 104 Turning the Bluetooth On . 104 Turning the Bluetooth Off . 105 Re-Pair Timer . 105 Bluetooth Drop Timer . 106 Pairing Bluetooth Device with the Radio . 107 Indicating Bluetooth Connection is Lost . 108 Turning On the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset) . 109 Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio) . 109 Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device . 110 Viewing the Bluetooth Active Devices . 110 Utilities . 111 Viewing the Recent Calls . 111 Selecting the Power Level . 112 Selecting a Radio Profile . 112 Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias . 113 Selecting the Audio Speaker . 113 Controlling the Display Backlight . 114 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad and Control . 115 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . 115 Turning Voice Mute On or Off . 116 C o n t e n t s vii English Using the Time-Out Timer . 116 Setting the Time and Date . 117 Editing the Time and Date . 117 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features . 118 Analog Options . 118 Digital Options . 118 Using the PL Defeat Feature . 119 Using the Digital PTT ID Feature . 119 Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) . 119 IMPRES Battery Annunciator . 120 Accessing the Battery Info screen . 120 Procedure: . 120 Accessing the General Radio Information . 121 Accessing the Radio Information . 121 Viewing the IP Information . 122 Viewing the Control Assignments . 123 Editing the Soft ID . 123 Voice Announcement . 124 Helpful Tips . 126 Acoustic Safety . 126 Caring for Your Radio . 127 Cleaning Your Radio . 128 Handling Your Radio . 129 s t n e t n o C viii English Servicing Your Radio . 129 Taking Care of the Battery . 130 Checking the Battery Charge Status . 130 LED and Sounds . 130 Fuel Gauge Icon . 130 Battery Recycling and Disposal . 131 Accessories . 132 Highlights for the Accessories . 132 Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range . 133 Special Channel Assignments . 133 Emergency Channel . 133 Non-Commercial Call Channel . 133 Operating Frequency Requirements . 134 Glossary . 136 Commercial Warranty . 141 Important Safety Information Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance
!
C a u t i o n Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio
(Motorola Publication part number 68012004065) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorola.com/APX Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R07.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 121 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of the Industry Canada rules per the conditions listed below:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference. 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n ix English Informations importantes sur la scurit Scurit du produit et respect des lignes directrices concernant l'exposition l'nergie RF
!
Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser ce produit, lisez les directives d'utilisation scuritaire prsentes dans le livret Scurit du produit et exposition l'nergie RF accompagnant votre radio. ATTENTION!
Cette radio est rserve un usage professionnel seulement pour satisfaire les normes d'exposition l'nergie RF de la FCC. Avant d'utiliser ce produit, lisez l'information sur la sensibilisation l'nergie RF et les directives d'utilisation prsentes dans le livret Scurit du produit et exposition l'nergie RF accompagnant votre radio (publication de Motorola, numro d'article 68012004065)) pour assurer le respect des limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. Pour obtenir une liste d'antennes et d'autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola, consultez le site Web :
http://www.motorola.com/APX t i r u c s a l r u s s e t n a t r o p m i s n o i t a m r o f n I x Franais Canadien Version du logiciel Toutes les fonctionnalits dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version du logiciel R07.00.00 ou ultrieure de la radio. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de l'administrateur de systme pour obtenir des renseignements toutes les fonctionnalits prises en charge. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et RSS 210 du rglement d'Industrie Canada selon les conditions numres ci-dessous:
1 Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. 3 Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. C o m p u t e r S o f t w a r e C o p y r i g h t s xi English Notes r e m a i l c s D i xii English Getting Started Take a moment to review the following:
How to Use This Guide . page 1 Notations Used in This Manual . page 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . page 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You. page 3 How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX 4000 Portables. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed.
!
!
W A R N I N G
!
C a u t i o n An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Note:
An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. 1 English The following special notations identify certain items:
Additional Performance Enhancement Example Home button or H Phone
>
Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. The following are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of APX radios. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)
DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV & D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 2 English CrossTalk Prevention
This feature prevents crosstalk scenario from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the Trident Transmitting SSI clock rate in the radio to be varied from the Receiving Frequency. This subsequently reduced the possibilities of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)
EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV & D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet
SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC OTAR feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper top and front display operation. You can also consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:
Is your radio preprogrammed with any preset conventional channels?
Which buttons have been preprogrammed to access other features?
What optional accessories may suit your needs?
G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 3 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Assemble your radio by following these steps:
Charging the Battery . page 4 Battery Charger . page 4 Attaching the Battery. page 5 Attaching the Antenna. page 6 Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover . page 6 Attaching the Belt Clip. page 7 Turning On the Radio . page 7 Adjusting the Volume . page 9 Charging the Battery
!
!
W A R N I N G To avoid a possible explosion:
DO NOT replace the battery in any area labeled hazardous atmosphere. DO NOT discard batteries in a fire. The Motorola-approved battery shipped with your radio is uncharged. Prior to using a new battery, charge it for a minimum of 16 hours to ensure optimum capacity and performance. For a list of Motorola-authorized batteries available for use with your radio, see Accessories on page 132. Note: When charging a battery attached to a radio, turn the radio off to ensure a full charge. Battery Charger
To charge the battery, place the battery, with or without the radio, in a Motorola-approved charger. The chargers LED indicates the charging progress; see your chargers user guide. For a list of chargers, see Accessories on page 132. i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 4 English Attaching the Battery With the radio turned off, slide the battery into the radios frame until the bottom latch clicks into place. To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Squeeze the release latch at the bottom of the battery until the battery releases from the radio. Remove the battery from the radio. Note: If your radio is preprogrammed with volatile-key retention, the encryption keys are retained for approximately 30 seconds after battery removal. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Battery Latch is at the bottom of the battery. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i You can view the status of your IMPRES battery. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 121 for more information. 5 English Attaching the Antenna With the radio turned off, set the antenna in its receptacle and turn clockwise to attach it to the radio. Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover The accessory connector is located on the antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect accessories to the radio. Note:
To prevent damage to the connector, shield it with the connector cover when not in use. i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. Make sure you turn off the radio first. 6 English Insert the hooked end of the cover into the slot above the connector. Press downward on the covers top to seat it in the slot. Once in place, tighten by rotating the thumbscrew clockwise by hand. Hooked End Thumbscrew Hex Socket Head To remove the accessory connector cover, rotate the thumbscrew counterclockwise until it disengages from the radio. If the thumbscrew is too tight, use an Allen wrench to loosen it first. Rotate and lift the connector cover to disengage it from the radio. Attaching the Belt Clip Turning On the Radio Align the grooves of the belt clip with those of the radio and press upward until you hear a click. Press the Control Knob until your radio display lights on, then release the knob. Tab To remove the clip, use a flat-
bladed object to press the belt clip tab away from the radio. Then, slide the clip downward and away from the radio. If the power-up test is successful, you see the Home screen. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 7 English Note:
If the power-up test is unsuccessful, you see Error XX/YY (XX/YY is an alphanumeric code). Turn off the radio, check the battery, and turn the radio back on. If the radio fails the power-up test again, record the Error XX/YY code and contact your dealer. Note:
If the power-up test is successful, but you see Hardware board absent or Hw Board Mismatch. Then, send the radio to the qualified technician to fix this error. If the power-up test is successful, but you see, Hw Board Failed or Man-Down Hw Error, send the radio to the qualified technician to fix this error. To turn off your radio, press and hold the Control Knob until the radio display shows Power off?, press the Menu Select button below Yes to power off. i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 8 English Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume, turn the MFK clockwise. The display shows volume bars and volume level when you change the volume. Note:
If Volume Change is secondary feature of the knob, see Multi Function Knob (MFK) on page 15 to toggle the function of the knob. Main Speaker To decrease the volume, turn this MFK counterclockwise. Note: Ensure that the main speaker is pointed towards you for increased loudness and intelligibility, especially in areas with loud background noises. Identifying Radio Controls Take a moment to review the following:
Radio Parts and Controls . page 10 Programmable Features . page 11 Assignable Radio Functions . page 11 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . page 13 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . page 14 Using the Menu Select Buttons . page 14 Using the Navigation Buttons . page 14 Using the Keypad. page 16 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . page 16 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . page 17 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . page 18 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . page 19 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button. page 20 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 9 English Radio Parts and Controls 1 2 3 4 Top (Orange) Button*
Top Lightbar Microphone Top Side
(Select) Button*
5 Push-to-Talk
(PTT) Button 6 7 8 9 Side Button 1*
Side Button 2*
Home Button 4-Way Navigation Button 17 Antenna 16 LED 15 Bluetooth Pairing Indicator 14 Speaker 18 Accessory Connector 13 12 11 10 Main Display Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button Keypad 22 Multi Function Control Knob*
21 Microphone 20 Battery 19 Battery Latch (at the bottom)
* These radio controls/buttons are programmable. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 10 English Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or qualified radio technician using the radio's programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:
Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions
Bluetooth On/Off Allows you to turn on/off the Bluetooth. Bluetooth Configuration Allows you to access to the Bluetooth menu. Bluetooth Audio Reroute Allows you to toggle the audio route between radio speaker or Remote Speaker Microphone and Bluetooth headset. Bluetooth Headset PTT Keys up the Bluetooth Headset's microphone. Bluetooth Data Devices Keys up the Bluetooth data devices. Bluetooth Clear All Pairing Allows you to clear all pairing info for Bluetooth. This is accessed by a long press of the Bluetooth On/Off Button. Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Dynamic ID (Conventional Only) Allows you to edit the radio's ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Information Displays the information of the radio. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name and status of the radio. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 11 English Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all location. Man Down Clear Clears the alarm of Man Down mode which was triggered when your radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and a motion sensitivity level. Message Enters the current message list. Mode Select Long-press programs a button with the radio's current zone and channels; then once programmed, the short-
press of that button jumps the radio to the programmed zone and channel. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel, from the scan list. One Touch 1 4 Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Private Line Defeat (Conventional Only) Overrides any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Radio Profiles Allows for easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher you want a new encryption keys. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Secure Transmission Select (Conventional and Trunking) Toggles the Secure Transmission On or Off when the Secure/
Clear Strapping fields is set to Select for the radios current channel, and when the radio is model/option capable. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 12 English Site Display/Search (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for AMSS
(Automatic Multiple Site Select) or SmartZone operation. Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Locks onto a specific site. Status Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Automatically registers with the server. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
Light/Flip Press the button to toggle the display backlight on or off. Keypad/Control Lock Toggles the keypad lock and/or MFK lock on or off. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Volume Set Tone Sets the volume set tone. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 13 English Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions
Using the Navigation Buttons You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:
A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. OR Use the Menu Select Buttons ({, |, and }). Using the Menu Select Buttons
The Menu Select buttons access the menu entries of features. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:
Press the Menu Select button ( | ) directly below Chan. Zone | Chan | MyId Home Button 4-Way Navigation Button Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button
Home Button The H button returns you to the Home (default) screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the H button is also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note: Some features do not require you to press H to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. Data Feature Button
Use this button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. 4-Way Navigation Button
Use this button to scroll up, down, left or right. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 14 English Multi Function Knob (MFK)
MFK is the on/off button of your radio. See Turning On the Radio on page 7 for the procedure to power up and down the radio. In addition, there are programmable features available for MFK, which are:
Mode Change Turn MFK to scroll the channel or zone list. Volume Change Turn MFK to increase or decrease the volume level of the speaker. Fast turn of MFK makes coarse tuning of the volume level; slow turn of MFK makes fine tuning of the volume level. The display shows the volume level and bars to indicate the current level. The level of last selected volume before the radio powers down remains the same when the radio powers up. The main display only shows the icon of secondary feature; the main display does not show the icon of primary feature. Your radio by default is set to use the primary feature. Short presses of MFK toggle it to work on either the secondary or primary feature. The secondary feature has an inactivity timer. This timer starts when the secondary feature is left idle. Your radio returns to primary feature when this timer expires. If the MFK is set to operate only one feature besides On/Off the radio, Volume Change should be the only feature applied to MFK. Consult your dealer or system administrator for the best options available for MFK. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 15 English Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The tables below show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.
Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 15
+
16
=
17
\
18 19 20
(
21
) 14
/
7 9
-
5
!
4
?
Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8
; @ _ 10
*
13
$
11
#
12
&
3
, C F I L O R V Y 2 Key 1
. 1 1 B 2 A E 3 D H 4 G K 5 J N 6 M Q 7 P U 8 T 9 W X 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.
* Space
# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. S Z l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 16 English
Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 14
/
7 9
-
5
!
4
?
Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8
; @ _ 10
*
13
$
11
#
12
&
3
, c f i l o r v y 2
. b e h k n q u x Key 1 1 1 2 a 3 d 4 g 5 j 6 m 7 p 8 t 9 w 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.
* Space
# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. s z 15
+
16
=
17
\
18 19 20
(
21
) I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 17 English 15
+
16
=
17
\
18 19 20
(
21
)
Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8
; @ _ 10
*
12
&
13
$
11
#
9
-
7 14
/
3
, 2
. 5
!
4
?
Key 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0
* Space
# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 18 English
Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode 3 2 B E A D Key 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0
* Not applicable
# Not applicable Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 10 12 13 11 9 14 5 6 7 4 C F 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 19 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT Button The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic purposes:
While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 41 for more information. Identifying Status Indicators Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:
Status Icons . page 21 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . page 23 Status Icons . page 23 TMS Menu Options . page 25 Call Type Icons . page 25 Top Lightbar and LED Indicators . page 26 LED Indications . page 27 Top Lightbar Indiations . page 27 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . page 28 Alert Tones. page 29 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts. page 33 s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 20 English Status Icons The 160 x 90 pixel front liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The top display row contain color icons that indicate radio operating conditions. The following icons are for the front display screen unless indicated otherwise. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Battery The number of bars (0 4) shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. Blinks when the battery is low. Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. O Direct On = Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off = Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On = The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. M K Off = The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. H or . Power Level L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 21 English i Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i k m l I 22 English G n o Location Signal On = Location feature is enabled, and location signal is available. Off = Location feature is disabled. Blinking = Location feature is enabled, but no location signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On = User is currently associated with the radio. Off = User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. b Bluetooth On Bluetooth is on and ready for bluetooth connection. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 76 for more information. Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth is currently connected to the external bluetooth device. Status Icons
The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. MFK is in Mode Change feature Turn the MFK to change the channel/zone. MFK is in Volume Change feature Turn the MFK to turn the volume up or down. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 23 English Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Y r 3/6 Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 24 English Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode.
TMS Menu Options Call Type Icons Menu Option Description/Function Back Clr Del Edit Exit No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes all messages. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. U
?
Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 25 English
%
Landline phone number. Top Lightbar and LED Indicators The Top Lightbar and LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. Incoming emergency call. Top Lightbar LED s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 26 English LED Indications
Solid red Radio is transmitting. Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow (Conventional Only) Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Note: No LED indication when the radio receives a clear
(non-secured) transmission in trunking Mode. Top Lightbar Indiations
The lightbar blinks green when the MFK is using the secondary feature. See Multi Function Knob (MFK) on page 15 to understand the functionality of MFK. The lightbar turn into solid color of orange, red or green depending on the status of Intelligent Lighting. See Intelligent Lighting Indicators on page 28 for different status of Intelligent Lighting. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 27 English Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporary changes the color of the Top Lightbar and adds a color bar to the main display screen to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:
This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Orange Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio initiates the Man Down Post-Alert timer. The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 28 English Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios condition. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name Heard Short, Low-Pitched Tone Long, Low-Pitched Tone Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Man Down Entry Time-Out Timer Timed Out When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. When radio initiates Man Down mode. After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Out of Range Invalid Mode
(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed.
(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Busy When system is busy. 29 English Tone Name Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received Emergency Alarm /Call Entry Heard When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. When entering the emergency state. Central Echo Volume Set When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. Emergency Exit When exiting the emergency state. Failsoft Automatic Call Back Talk Permit Keyfail When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request.
(When PTT button is pressed) verifying system accepting transmissions. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call When Call Alert or Private Call is received. Call Alert Sent Site Trunking When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. You Hear Medium-Pitched Short, Tone Medium-Pitched Long, Tone A Group of Medium-Pitched Tones s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 30 English You Hear Short, High-Pitched Tone (Chirp) Ringing Low-Pitched Gurgle Unique, Chirp Unique, High-Pitched Chirp Tone Name Heard Low-Battery Chirp When battery is below preset threshold value. Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.
(When the PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. Doh-Sol Sol-Doh MFK Enters Secondary Feature MFK Exits Secondary Feature When MFK is toggled to secondary feature. When MFK is toggled to exit secondiary feature and return to primary feature. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 31 English You Hear Incremental-
Pitched Tone Decremental-
Pitched Tone Tone Name Bluetooth Paired Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth Unpaired Heard When Bluetooth accessory is paired with the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is connected to the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is unpaired from the radio. Bluetooth Disconnected When Bluetooth accessory is disconnected from the radio. Man Down Continuous Tone When radio is in Man Down mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. A Group of Very High-Pitched Tones s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 32 English Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts The following appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear You See When Notes A Long Tone A Busy Tone No phone You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. Phone busy The phone system is busy. Press H to exit the phone mode and try your call later. Phone busy When a channel is not available. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. No acknowledge A High-
Pitched Tone The call is not acknowledged. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. When you release the PTT button. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. Note: You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 33 English Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. MFK General Radio Operation Once you understand how your APX Portable is configured, you are ready to use your radio. Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic Call features:
Selecting a Zone . page 34 Selecting a Radio Channel . page 35 Using Channel Search Button. page 36 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. page 39 Making a Radio Call . page 41 Repeater or Direct Operation . page 45 Monitoring Features . page 45 Use the following procedure to select a zone. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If Mode Change is secondary feature of the MFK, see Multi Function Knob (MFK) on page 15 to toggle the function of MFK. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 34 English Procedure:
Turn the preprogrammed Zone Change MFK to the required zone and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Zone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. 3 U or D to the required zone. OR Use the keypad to enter the zone number. 4 If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step 3. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the displayed zone. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/
receive frequency pairs. G e n e r a MFK l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Use the following procedure to select a channel. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If you select a channel that is not within the preprogrammed band, the radio indicates that it is on an unsupported frequency with both audio and visual warnings. Consult a qualified radio technician for the right choice between the following methods. 35 English If Mode Change is secondary feature of MFK, see Multi Function Knob (MFK) on page 15 to toggle the function of MFK. Procedure:
Turn the preprogrammed MFK to the desired channel. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Chan. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. 3 U or D to the required channel. OR Use the keypad to enter the channel number. 4 If the channel number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step 3. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Using Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by key in the alias of the channel. If the name matches, your radio prompts the first found matched channel name. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to CSrh. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below CSrh to key in the channel name. 3 A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 36 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below CSrh once the entry is done to initiate searching. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to exit. 5 The display shows Searching. OR If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid Entry. Repeat step 3. 6 Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changed its transmission to this channel. OR If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found. Repeat from step 3 if want to search again; or press H or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. Using Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save your radios current zone and channel to a programmable button, keypad button or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey jumps the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:
Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 37 English Saving a Zone and Channel to a Softkey
Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequent used zone and channel. Procedure:
1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 < or > to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below the softkey. 4 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note:
To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Saving a Zone and Channel to a Keypad Button
All the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons allow you to save the frequent used zone and channel. Procedure:
1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the digit button you desire to program. 3 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note: Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 38 English Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. LED The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:
When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen), depending on how your radio is preprogrammed:
1 ASTRO Conventional Only:
The LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:
The display shows the caller alias or ID. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 41 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 39 English
Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
(Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. These one-to-one calls between two radios are not heard by others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:
When you receive a Private Call:
1 You hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. OR Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 During the call, the display shows the caller alias (name), if it is in the call list. OR During the call, the display shows the caller ID (number), if the callers name is not in the call list. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 42 for details on making a Private Call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 40 English
Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call
(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:
Use the preprogrammed Call Response button to answer a Telephone Call:
1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen and the bar turns green. The display shows Phone Call and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 44 for details on making a Telephone Call. Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:
MFK preprogrammed with Channel Change or Zone Change A preprogrammed One Touch Call button The Contacts list (see Viewing Details of a Contact on page 58) Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:
1 Turn the MFK to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 41 English 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 4 ASTRO Conventional Only:
The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:
The LED lights up solid red. 5 Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only)
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. OR U or D to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 42 English 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. 5 The display shows Calling... <Number>. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only)
This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 64 for more information. Note:
Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. OR U or D to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 43 English 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. 5 The display shows Calling... <Number>. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. OR If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)
This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted phone number. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. OR U or D to the required phone number. OR Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press and release the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts on page 33 for more information if your call is NOT answered. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 44 English Repeater or Direct Operation Monitoring Features Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. This digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. The REPEATER operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The DIRECT or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct button to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Dir. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. 3 The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. OR The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 45 English Monitoring a Channel
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Monitor button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 Select the desired zone and channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. 3 Adjust the Volume Change MFK if necessary. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. 5 Release the PTT button to receive (listen). The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display when you monitor a channel via the preprogrammed Monitor button. Conventional Mode Operation
Your radio may be preprogrammed to receive Private-Line
(PL) calls. Procedure:
1 Momentarily press the Monitor button to listen for activity. The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display. 2 Press and hold the Monitor button to set continuous monitor operation. The duration of the button press is programmable. 3 Press the Monitor button again, or the PTT button, to return to the original squelch setting. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 46 English Advanced Features Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced features available with your radio:
Advanced Call Features . page 47 Contacts . page 51 Scan Lists . page 59 Scan . page 61 Call Alert Paging . page 63 Emergency Operation . page 65 Man Down . page 68 Automatic Registration Service (ARS). page 73 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . page 76 Secure Operations. page 87 Security . page 92 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . page 93 Trunking System Controls . page 102 Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth -. page 104 Utilities. page 111 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Advanced Call Features
Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call
Procedure:
1 When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. You hear two alert tones, the LED lights up solid yellow to indicate the transmitting radio is still sending signal. OR the LED blinks solid green once to indicate the transmitting radio is pending to receive signal. 2 The speaker unmutes. 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 47 English 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen.
Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note: Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 87 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup
Procedure:
1 < or > to Tgrp. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored, Sel and Exit. Making a Selective Call
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. OR U or D to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 48 English 3 U or D to Preset for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. OR U or D to the required talkgroup. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the corresponding talkgroup in the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 5 If the encryption key associated to the new talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. OR If the encryption key that is associated to the new talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 6 Press H to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Sending a Status Call
This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Status button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Sts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. 3 The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 4 U or D to the required status. OR Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 5 Press the PTT button to send the status. 49 English 6 When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. OR If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Call is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, you will hear an alert tone until you press H or the PTT button.
Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:
If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 50 English Procedure:
1 When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a gurgle tone and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only)
This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Rpgm. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. 3 The display shows Reprgrm rqst and Please wait. 4 If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. OR If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press H to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classifying Regrouped Radios
The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories: Select Enabled or Select Disabled. Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to 5 IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:
Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. 51 English Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note:
Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts
Note:
Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:
Use the Options Menu. 1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 U or D to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 52 English 6 U or D to select the call type. 7 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 8 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 9 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. 10 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. OR Use the PTT button. 1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the required subscriber alias. 4 < or > to scroll through the available IDs for the selected subscriber alias. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 7 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid yellow. 8 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. Adding a New Contact Entry
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to {New Contact} and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 U or D to Name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 5 The display shows Edit name and a blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 53 English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have entered the name. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 7 U or D to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 U or D to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 9 The display shows Edit Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have entered the number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 11 U or D to Type 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. U or D to the required mode and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. OR Repeat Steps 8 through 10 to enter or edit the existing system IDs. OR U or D to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add a new number. Repeat Steps 8 through 10. 12 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. 13 The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. 14 The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 54 English Deleting a Contact Entry
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Adding a Contact to a Call List
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 3 U or D to the entry you want to add to a call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 U or D to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 The display shows <Entry> confirm del?. 6 Select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen for Contacts. OR Select No to return to the main screen for Contacts. 4 U or D to Add to CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 U or D to the required Call List and press the Menu Select button directly below Add. OR U or D to Cncl to return to the main display for Contacts. 6 The display momentarily shows Please wait before showing <Entry> added, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. 7 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 55 English Removing a Contact from a Call List
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to remove from a call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 U or D to Rm frm CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 The display shows <Entry> remove?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to remove the entry from the Call List. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main display for Contacts. 7 The display momentarily shows Please wait before showing <Entry> removed, confirming the removal of the contact from the list. 8 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English
Editing a Contact in a Call List Editing an Entry Alias
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 U or D to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Editing as Entry ID
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 U or D to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 57 English Editing a Call Type
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Viewing Details of a Contact
Procedure:
1 < or > to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 3 U or D to the entry you want to view and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 U or D to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 U or D to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to select. 7 The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. 4 U or D to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 The display shows all the numbers associated with the entry. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/
groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:
Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Please refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List
Procedure:
1 < or > to ScnL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. 3 U or D to view the members on the list. 4 Press H to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. Editing the Scan List
This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. Procedure:
Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button) and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to ScnL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/
or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 59 English Changing the Scan List Status
Procedure:
1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). 2 The display shows the programming mode icon and the first list member. 3 U or D to the number you want to edit. 4 Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. OR Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 5 U or D to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. OR Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. 5 U or D to select more channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the keypad to go directly to additional channels to be added or deleted. 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 61 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English Viewing and Changing the Priority Status
Procedure:
1 Below the Sel, Del, and Rcl screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view and/or change the priority status of the currently displayed channel. OR Below the Sel, Del, and Rcl screen, press the Select button one or more times to view and/or change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 2 A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. OR A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. OR A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-
One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. OR No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Scan. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. 3 The display shows Scan off if scan is disabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to enable scan. OR The display shows Scan on and the scan status icon if scan is enabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to disable scan. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 The radio returns to the Home screen. 61 English Deleting a Nuisance Channel
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise
(termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Procedure:
1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, press the preprogrammed Nuisance Delete button. OR
< or > to Nuis. Press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. 2 The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list.
Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list
(except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. Procedure:
1 When the radio locks onto the channel designated as the new Priority-Two channel, press the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button. 2 The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Restoring a Nuisance Channel
Procedure:
To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:
Turn the radio off and then turning it on again. OR Stop and restart a scan via the preprogrammed Scan button or menu. OR Change the channel via the MFK. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, OR when you press the PTT button. Note:
This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Receiving a Call Alert Page
Procedure:
1 When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. 2 The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 41 or Making a Private Call
(Trunking Only) on page 42 for more information on returning the call. 63 English 6 If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. OR If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. 3 U or D to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. 4 If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. Sending a Call Alert Page
Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Page. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. 3 Press Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR U or D to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to send the page. 5 The display shows Paging... <Number>. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to send the call alert page. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to exit the screen without sending the call alert page. 6 The display shows Paging... <Alias>. 7 If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. OR If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 8 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Top (Orange) button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:
Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency modes above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button. Note:
To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Man Down is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature on the condition the Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. See Man Down on page 68 for details. 65 English Sending an Emergency Alarm
This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Note:
Emergency button press timer by default is set to 1 second. This timer is programmable from 0 6 seconds by a qualified technician. Procedure:
1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, you hear a medium-pitched tone and the LED momentarily blinks red. OR You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 When you receive the dispatchers acknowledgment, the display shows Ack received. You hear four tones, the alarm ends, and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. OR If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows No acknowledge. The alarm ends and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)
This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel. Note:
The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except, if enabled, it returns to one of the following:
Tactical/Non-Revert You talk on the channel you selected before you entered the emergency state. Non-Tactical/Revert You talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent on this same channel. Procedure:
1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone and the LED momentarily blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 6 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Emergency Call mode. 5 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone.
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Procedure:
1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone and the LED momentarily blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 The radio enters the Emergency Call state when:
You receive the dispatchers acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. OR You receive no acknowledgement. The display shows No acknowledge. OR You press the PTT button while in the Emergency Alarm mode. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 7 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Emergency Call mode. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio without any audio or visual indicators. Procedure:
1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 The silent emergency state continues until you:
Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode. OR Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. 67 English Note:
For ALL Emergency signals, when changing channels:
If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is NOT preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. Using the Emergency Keep-Alive Feature
This feature, when enabled, prevents the radio from being turned off via the MFK when the radio is in the Emergency state. Note:
The radio only exits the Emergency state using one of the ways mentioned in the previous sections. See Sending an Emergency Alarm on page 66, Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) on page 66, Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call on page 67, or Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm on page 67. Man Down Man Down condition is determined based upon the radio tilt angle or a combination of radio tilt angle and the lack of radio motion. Man Down feature is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature if Emergency has been programmed in your radio. Your radio automatically activates Emergency Alarm or Call when the radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and radio motion below the motion sensitivity level, depending upon how the radio is programmed. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. Note:
It is recommended that an Emergency button is preprogrammed in order to allow the user to exit the emergency condition. The Man Down feature provides a Clear function to the user. After a Man Down condition has been detected, the user can press a preprogrammed Clear button or preprogrammed Menu Select button to cancel the Man Down condition. The radio remains in the Man Down state without triggering an emergency condition until the radio is moved out of the Man Down state, at which point Man Down functionality resumes. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English The Man Down feature has three phases:
i The radio senses the Man Down condition and Pre-Alert Timer is initiated. ii Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Pre-Alert Timer field. At the end of this time, the radio alerts the user on the Man Down status with an audible alert tone and Man Down text on the screen. The Post-Alert Timer also initiates at this point. iii Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. Once the timer expires, the Emergency alarm is transmitted. The Man Down Clear function is used in this phase to cancel the Man Down condition. The following scenarios affect the timers:
Pressing the PTT button suspends the Man Down timers;
releasing the PTT button reinitiates the Pre-Alert Timer. Pressing other buttons on the radio does not impact these timers. Repositioning the radio exits the Man Down feature, which stops and resets the timers. Pressing a preprogrammed Clear button or pressing a Menu Select button preprogrammed for Clear stops and resets the timers. The timers do not restart until the radio is repositioned. Note:
Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. For details on operating the Emergency alerts, please see Emergency Operation on page 65. If the radio is preprogrammed to horizontal only, it must be worn in a vertical position otherwise the Man Down alert may be inadvertently triggered. When the radio is programmed with Man Down feature, special care is required when charging the radio with a wall mounted charger. See Handling Your Radio on page 129 for details. Pre-Alert Timer
This timer sets the amount of time that a Man Down condition must be present before the radio-user is warned of the Man Down condition. When the radio detects that it has returned to the vertical position or when the radio detects motion, the Pre-Alert timer stops and is reset. The Pre-Alert timer reinitiates when the radio detects it is in the horizontal position or motionless again. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 69 English Triggering Emergency
When the user does not clear the Man Down condition and the Post-Alert Timer comes to an end, Emergency Alarm or call is triggered. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. The radio also sends ID number and GPS coordinates to dispatcher if these features are enabled. User can exit Emergency following the Emergency procedure. See Emergency Operation on page 65 for details. Note:
At this point the Man Down features is complete. Use normal Emergency procedures to cancel Emergency transmissions. Post-Alert Timer
This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Man Down condition before the Emergency alarm is transmitted. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio alerts the user with an audible tone and displays the Man-
Down text. See Exiting Man Down Feature on page 71 to exit Man Down feature.
Alerting User When Man Down Feature is Triggered The Man Down alert tone volume is directly related to the radios volume. Ensure that the radios volume is loud enough so that the user does not miss the Post-Alert tone. Note:
If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. Note:
If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio including the Man Down tones. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English Exiting Man Down Feature
If you are not in a real Man Down situation, you should exit the Man Down feature and prevent emergency from going off with the following operation. Procedure:
Repositioning the radio or shaking the radio (when motion sensitivity is enabled). OR Press the preprogrammed Man Down Clear button to exit. OR Press the Menu Select Button below Clr to exit. Re-Initiating Man Down
After exiting the Emergency Operation when the radio is still in Man Down condition (tilted achieving threshold angle or motionless), user must first exit Man Down condition to then re-
initiate the Man Down feature. Procedure:
Return the radio to the vertical position OR Shake the radio (when motion sensitivity is enabled). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 71 English Handling Man Down Functional Error Messages
Procedure:
1 If your radio display shows one of the following error messages: Hardware board absent, Man-Down Hw error or Hw Board Mismatch. Send the radio to the qualified technician to fix this error. Testing the Man Down Feature
Note:
Enable the Emergency feature with Silent Alarm disabled, but not in Surveillance Mode before running this test on the radio. Procedure:
When Man Down is enabled on the radio:
1 Turn the radio on and place in the vertical position, for at least 5 seconds. 2 Lay the radio down in the horizontal position. 3 Wait for alert tone. 4 The radio alerts with audible tone and displays Man-Down. OR If no tone is heard, make sure that the Man Down feature is enabled on your radio. If Man Down feature was not enabled, please enable it and go through steps 1,2 and 3 again. OR If the Man Down feature is enabled and no tone is heard, send the radio to a qualified technician. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Advanced Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:
ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note:
The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode
Procedure:
Turn the preprogrammed MFK, once the zone you want is displayed, to the desired mode. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Chan. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. The display shows the current channel name. 3 U or D to the required channel or mode. 4 In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. OR In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. OR If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat Step 3. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 Press Sel to confirm the displayed channel. 73 English Accessing the User Login Feature
This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example:
Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note: Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (A Z), small letters (a z), numbers (0 9), symbols (*, -, #, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight (8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English Logging In as a User
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed User Login button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to User. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below User. 3 The display shows the User Login screen. 4 U or D to {ID Entry} and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears beside Id:. Use the keypad to enter a username. OR U or D to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select the predefined username. OR Press and hold U or D to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select the predefined username. 5 If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. Repeat Step 4. OR A blinking cursor appears beside PIN:. Use the keypad to enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number appears as asterisks. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. 7 In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl. OR In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. OR In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. 8 If the username is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 4. OR If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 6. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to cancel the login in progress screen and return to the initial user login screen. OR Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. Logging Out
Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. Procedure:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. 2 The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display momentary shows Private data cleared. OR Select No to keep your private data. Note: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 75 English Text Messaging Service (TMS) This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. There are three (3) types of text messages:
A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:
Inbox Compose Drafts Sent Note: See Status Icons on page 21 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 25 for more information on each menu option. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English Accessing the TMS Features
Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the main menu options. Composing and Sending a New Text Message
Note: During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-
tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for 1, pressing the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap). Procedure:
1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 U or D to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to compose a new message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. 77 English Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 10 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 11 If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 80 for more information. You can also select the Save to Drafts option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 84 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English Sending a Quick Text Message
Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 U or D to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. 5 U or D to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. 6 The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 8 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 11 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 12 If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 80 for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 79 English
Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message.
Note:
Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:
After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 77 for more information):
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message as important. 3 The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message
Procedure:
After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 77 for more information):
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message
Procedure:
After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 77 for more information):
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. 3 The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message
Procedure:
After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 77 for more information):
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar.
Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Procedure:
After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 77 for more information):
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 U or D to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message as important. AND U or D to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. 3 The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar.
Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Procedure:
After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 77 for more information):
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message as important. AND U or D to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 81 English
Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message
Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. Procedure:
When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and go to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 The new message icon appears and the display momentarily shows New msg. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. 3 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox
The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note: U or D to read the message if fills more than one screen. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Sel. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English 4 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 5 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:
The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 23 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message
Note:
The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. Procedure:
1 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 3 U or D to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. OR U or D to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. OR U or D to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. 4 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. OR The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have finished writing the message. 7 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to send the message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 83 English 8 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 80 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder
This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:
1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Sel. 4 The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 5 U or D to the required text message press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit, Del., or Back to access the option. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Managing Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sel. 4 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. 5 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:
The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 23 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message
Procedure:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 85 English 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 5 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 80 for more information. Deleting a Text Message
Procedure:
From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen:
1 U or D to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the current message. Deleting All Text Messages
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Inbox or Sent then press the Menu Select button below Clr to select all messages in the selected folder. 4 The display shows Del All?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Selecting Secure Transmissions
Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Secure/Clear button to the secure position. Note:
If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Clear TX only. Selecting Clear Transmissions
Procedure:
Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear button to the clear position. Note:
If the selected channel is preprogrammed for secure-
only operation when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Secure TX only. The radio will not transmit until you set the Secure/
Clear button to the secure position.
Managing Encryption A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Loading an Encryption Key
Note: Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. The radio will not transmit until you set the Secure/
Clear button to the clear position. Procedure:
1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 The display shows Keyloading, and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. 87 English 3 Select the required keys and press the Menu Select button directly below LOAD on the KVL. This loads the encryption keys into your radio. 4 When the key has been loaded successfully, you hear a short tone for single-key radios. OR When the key has been loaded successfully, you hear an alternating tone for multikey radios. Using the Multikey Feature
This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:
Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied
(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-
selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-
selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-
selectable key erasure. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English Selecting an Encryption Key
Procedure:
1 < or > to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 U or D to scroll through the encryption keys. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. OR Turn the MFK to exit. Note: When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. OR When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. Selecting a Keyset
This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. Note: Press H, the PTT button, or the Exit menu selection, or turn the MFK to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Procedure:
1 < or > to KSet. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 3 U or D to scroll through the keysets. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. 5 The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys
This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Procedure:
1 < or > to Eras. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 U or D to the desired encryption key. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. The display shows the available key erase options. 5 U or D to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 At Erase all keys?, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to erase all the encryption keys in the radio OR No to return to the previous screen. OR A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 89 English At Erase single key?, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to erase the displayed encryption key OR No to return to the previous screen. 7 Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. OR Turn the MFK to exit. OR Use the preprogrammed Top Side (Select) button and Top
(Orange) button to erase the single key in radios with the single-key option, and to erase all keys in radios with the multikey option. 1 Press and hold the Top Side (Select) button. 2 While holding Top Side (Select) button down, press the Top
(Orange) button. 3 The display shows Please wait. 4 When all the encryption keys have been erased, the display shows All keys erased. Note: DO NOT press the Top (Orange) button before pressing the Top Side (Select) button, unless you are in an emergency situation as this sends an emergency alarm.
Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. Procedure:
1 < or > to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. OR Press the PTT button again, or the Home or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. 4 If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. Note:
The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). This key must be loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page
This feature allows to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features.It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-
up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note:
This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear
There are two components of Hear Clear. 1 Companding:
Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. 2 Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter):
Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving in a transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Note:
This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 91 English Security Radio Lock
This feature changes your radio to a more robust security system that protects the use of the secure encryption keys. If this feature is enabled in your radio by a qualified radio technician, when you turn the radio on, the display shows Radio locked. Unlocking Your Radio
Procedure:
1 Enter your numeric password. Secure-equipped radios 6 to 8 characters. Clear radios 0 to 8 characters. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to enter the code. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to exit the feature. 3 If the password is correct, the radio unlocks. OR If the password is incorrect, the display show Incorrect password and the radio remains locked. If you enter three incorrect passwords in a row, the display shows Deadlock. Turn the radio off and then on, and begin again at Step 1. IMPORTANT:
For Secure Radios Only After a total of 17 consecutive incorrect passwords (turning the radio off and on does not reset this number), the radio erases all of its encryption keys and shows Deadlock. See a qualified radio technician. If you forget the password, enter ******** to erase all keys and revert the password in the radio back to the default password of 01234567. Changing Your Password
Procedure:
1 < or > to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. 3 Enter the old password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 5 Enter the new password. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 7 Re-enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The password is updated. OR If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 8. Note:
If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on.
Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature
(Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Procedure:
1 < or > to Logf. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logf. 3 Display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. OR Display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. The Global Positioning System (GPS) This feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Understanding the GPS Feature
The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location coordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:
In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles 93 English Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Note: Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 20 meters from your actual location, but sometimes further away. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:
The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. Enhancing GPS Performance
Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, please note the following guidelines:
For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)
This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:
Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature
Note: An ON menu key may be present on the location menu if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. 3 The display shows Location off. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to obtain a location fix. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. U or D to Turn On GPS and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 The front display shows the latitude, longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 95 English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh to obtain a new location fix. 7 The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. 8 Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude and longitude, along with the UTC (Zulu) time and date that the location fix was obtained. The location coordinates are updated automatically every five seconds while the location signal is present. OR If the radio fails to get a location fix, the display shows No service and returns to the previous display. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. The radio also exits the menu if the emergency button is pressed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Saving a Waypoint
Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. OR U or D to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to Step 5. OR U or D to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to Step 5. 3 A blinking cursor appears in the Save As Waypt screen. Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. 5 The display shows saved as <Waypoint name>. OR The display shows saved as {Home}. OR The display shows saved as {Destination}. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing a Saved Waypoint
Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to scroll through the list. OR U or D to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 6 U or D to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the latitude, longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. 97 English 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 8 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint
Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 U or D to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. Use the keypad to edit the alias. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint
Note: Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination are editable. Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to {Home} and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. OR U or D to {Destination} and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 U or D to Edit Location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 The first number blinks. Press < to move to the previous number/coordinates. Press > to move back to the next number/coordinates. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done with the new coordinates. 10 The display shows {Home} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. OR The display shows {Destination} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 99 English Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint
Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Deleting All Saved Waypoints
Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. U or D to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 5 The display shows <Waypoint name> confirm del?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display momentarily shows <Waypoint name>
deleted before the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to a saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 U or D to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 The display shows All saved wayp confirm del?. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 8 The display momentarily shows All saved waypnts deleted before the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 100 English
Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint
Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode Procedure:
While in the current location display:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System
The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. Procedure:
1 During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. 2 You hear a medium-pitched tone every 10 seconds and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English Going Out of Range
When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. Procedure:
1 You hear a low-pitched tone. AND/OR The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. 2 Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until:
It locks onto a control channel. OR It locks onto a failsoft channel. OR It is turned off. Using the Site Trunking Feature
If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. Locking and Unlocking a Site
This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. Procedure:
Use the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button to toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Lock to lock the site. The display shows Site locked. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk to unlock the site. The display shows Site unlocked. 4 The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing a Site
This feature allows you to view the name of the current site or forces your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site
Procedure:
1 Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. 2 The display momentarily shows the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator
(RSSI). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Changing the Current Site
Procedure:
1 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. 2 You hear a tone and the display momentarily shows Scanning site. 3 When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. 103 English Mission Critical Wireless
- Bluetooth -
Note:
The use of this feature requires the "Full Feature"
expansion board together with the Bluetooth Software. This feature allows your radio to extend its functionality by connecting to external proprietary Motorola Accessories. The default setting for Bluetooth-enabled radio is Bluetooth ON. See Turning the Bluetooth Off on page 105 to turn the Bluetooth OFF. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Turning the Bluetooth On
Procedure:
1 < or > to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. 2 U or D to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows Status On, and b appears. OR The display shows Bluetooth on failed to indicate Bluetooth fails to launch. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. OR 1 Press the preprogrammed button to turn on the Bluetooth. 2 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth on, and b appears. OR The display shows Bluetooth on failed to indicate Bluetooth has failed to launch. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Turning the Bluetooth Off
Procedure:
1 < or > to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. 2 U or D to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Status Off, and b disappears. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. OR 1 Press the preprogrammed button, to turn off the Bluetooth. 2 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth off, and b disappears. Re-Pair Timer
There are two options for configuring the radios Bluetooth pairing type. The type defines the duration the radio and the accessory retain the pairing information. Immediate (For headset and PTT only.) When the radio and/or device is turned off after pairing, the keys are lost. Due to this, when your radio and your device are turned back on, they are unable to re-connect. The user must re-pair the devices to re-establish a new set of pairing keys. See Pairing Bluetooth Device with the Radio on page 107. Infinite (For headset, PTT and data devices.) When the radio and/or device are turned off after pairing, keys are NOT lost. When the radio and the device are turned back on, they can resume the Bluetooth connection without user intervention. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 105 English Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate
(for headset and PTT only) Infinite
(for headset, PTT and data devices) Re-Pair Timer Scenarios When the radio is powered OFF, pairing key is lost immediately, and accessory attempts to pair again. If pairing is unsuccessful within the Drop Timer value, the accessory automatically powers OFF. When the accessory is powered OFF, all keys are lost immediately, and the user must re-pair the devices. When the devices lose Bluetooth connection, the devices will attempt to re-
establish Bluetooth Connection within the Drop Timer value. When the radio is powered OFF, the accessory attempts to re-establish the Bluetooth Connection for a period of time depending upon the Drop Timer value. If the devices fails to reconnect within the period, the accessory then powers OFF. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English Bluetooth Drop Timer
The Bluetooth Drop Timer has two different settings and functions, depending upon the selection of the Re-Pair Timer. Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate
(for headset and PTT only) Infinite
(for headset, PTT and data devices) Description 0 15 minutes programmable buffer time to re-establish the Bluetooth Connection when the Bluetooth signal is out of range. If either device powers OFF, the pairing keys are immediately cleared from both devices and the devices must re-pair. This Timer only applies to the accessory. The programmable timer choices are: 0 15 minutes, 2 hours, 4 hours or 8 hours. This is a "stay alive" time that the accessory will remain ON without the devices re-
connecting before powering off. The radio will remain ON until the user powers the radio OFF. The radio and accessory will remain paired indefinitely. Once the devices re-connect, the timer is reset. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information about these timers. See Pairing Bluetooth Device with the Radio on page 107 to establish the Bluetooth Connection.
Pairing Bluetooth Device with the Radio Bluetooth Pairing Indicator The range of Bluetooth operation is 10 meters line-of-sight communication. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the signal transmitter (your radio) and the location of the receiver (your device or accessory). Obstacles that can cause an obstruction in the line-of-sight include trees, buildings, mountains, cars and etc. It is NOT recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your accessory to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position the Accessory and Radio closer to each other
(within the 10 meter defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:
Note: Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. With your radios Bluetooth feature ON, and the Bluetooth tones enabled:
1 Turn on the accessory, then place it close to your radio aligning the blue dot-pairing indicator on the radio and the accessory. 2 If the pairing process is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone to indicate paired. OR If the pairing process fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Bluetooth alternating with pairing failed. Repeat step 1 again. 3 The radio continues to connect to the device. If the connecting process is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> alternating with connected, and the Bluetooth icon turns from b to a. OR 107 English
Indicating Bluetooth Connection is Lost The radio shows a when the devices have a Bluetooth connection. Below is the scenario and radio indications when the connection is interrupted. Procedure:
1 The a starts blinking for up to 10 seconds. You hear a decremental-pitched tone and the display shows <Device Type> alternating with disconnected. 2 If the Bluetooth device successfully re-connects before the Bluetooth 10 second Re-Connection Timer expires, the display shows momentary <Device Type> alternating with connected, and a stops blinking. OR If the Bluetooth device fails to re-connect within 10 seconds, the blinking a is replaced by a persistent b. If the device already have pairing records and the connecting process fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> alternating with connect failed. Repeat step 2 to reconnect the Bluetooth device. OR If the connecting process is immediately following the pairing process and the connecting process fails to complete within the 6 seconds, you hear a decremental-
pitched tone to indicate unpaired. The display shows
<Device Type> alternating with unpaired. Repeat step 1 to re-initiate the pairing process. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English
Turning On the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset)
Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio) Procedure:
1 < or > to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. 2 U or D to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows On. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. Procedure:
1 < or > to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. 2 U or D to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Off. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. OR 1 Short press the preprogrammed button to route the audio routing from the radio to the headset. OR 1 Press the preprogrammed button to route the audio routing from the headset to the radio. 2 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Headset on. 2 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Speaker on. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 109 English
Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device Procedure:
With the Bluetooth audio device connected to the radio:
1 Adjust volume up/down on the bluetooth audio device. 2 You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The radio display shows volume bars and Volume XX. Viewing the Bluetooth Active Devices
Procedure:
1 < or > to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. 2 U or D to Device and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 The display shows a list of current active Bluetooth devices with the active status below the device name. OR The display shows No devices if there are no active Bluetooth devices being detected. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Clearing All Pairing Information
Procedure:
Long press the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. Proceed to step 3. OR In the Bluetooth feature screen, 1 U or D to Device and press the Menu Select button directly below Clr to clear all active Bluetooth devices. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. 2 The display shows Clear all BT devices?. Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to proceed. 3 The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. 4 The display shows All BT devices cleared to indicate clearing is successful. OR You hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. Note:
If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) Utilities Viewing the Recent Calls
This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:
Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Emergency Call (Incoming Only) Note:
The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. OR Press H or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Recent Calls button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Rcnt. 111 English Selecting the Power Level
This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that require a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Selection Transmit Power Level High Low 0.25 Watt 0.03 Watt Note: Please refer to your agent or qualified radio technician to enable or disable this feature. These reduced transmit power level settings do not affect your radios receiving performance, nor diminish the overall quality of ther adios audio and data functionality. Settings:
Select Low for a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Select High for a longer transmitting distance. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English Procedure:
Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level button to toggle the power level between low and high power. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Pwr. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. 3 The display shows Low power and the low power icon. OR The display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile
This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:
Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Prfl. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the menu selections. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias
This feature allows you to display or hide the radio alias (name). Procedure:
1 Press the Menu Select button directly below MyID. 2 The display momentarily shows Radio ID off, and the radio alias disappears from the Home screen. OR The display momentarily shows Radio ID on, and the radio alias appears on the Home screen. Selecting the Audio Speaker
This feature allows you to select the speaker route for the radio's audio from either the main or the secondary speaker using the radio profile settings. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s While both speakers function together with the secondary speaker enhancing intelligibility of the received audio during typical radio operation, each speaker has an independently-tuned frequency response and volume level operation. 113 English Controlling the Display Backlight
You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio's front display. Note:
The backlight setting also affects the Menu Select buttons, the Menu Navigation buttons and the keypad backlighting accordingly. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Light/Flip button to toggle the backlight on or off. OR Press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons to turn the backlight on. Note:
The backlight remains on for a preprogrammed time before it automatically turns off completely or returns to the minimum backlight level. The secondary speaker also has a "whisper" mode with a modified volume taper for quieter modes of operation. Note:
If an external speaker or microphone accessory is attached to the radio, neither internal speaker is operational as audio is routed to the accessory. Procedure:
Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Prfl. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the menu selections. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the radio profile with the required speaker routing. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English Locking and Unlocking the Keypad and Control
You can lock your radios keypad, programmable buttons and MFK to avoid inadvertent key entry. Check with your dealer or qualified technician for best selection to suite your usage. Procedure:
1 Press the preprogrammed Keypad Lock button to toggle the lock on or off. 2 The display shows Kypd/Ctrl Lock. To unlock, press the preprogrammed button again.. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
You can enable and disable keypad tones, if needed. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button to turn the tones off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Mute. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. 3 The display momentarily shows Tones off, indicating that the keypad tones are disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the keypad tones are enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 115 English Turning Voice Mute On or Off
You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button to turn the feature off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to VMut. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. 3 The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English Using the Time-Out Timer
This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note: You will hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:
1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 Press the PTT button to re-transmit. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Setting the Time and Date
You can set the time and date for your radio. Settings:
The default time setting is a 12-hour clock.The display shows 12:00AM. Editing the Time and Date
Procedure:
1 < or > to Clck. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Clck. The display shows the current setting of the radio. The AM/PM selection is not available for the 24-hour clock setting. The default setting for the domestic date shows MDY. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for additional programmable settings for this feature. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The first item blinks. 4 U or D to change the selected item. OR
< or > one or more times to move to an item you wish to change. U or D to change the selected item. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes and return to the Home screen. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished to save your changes and return to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to discard all changes and return to the Home screen. Press H at any time to return to the Home screen without saving your changes. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 117 English Note:
If a call arrives while the radio is in the clock-setting menu, the radio exits clock setting and displays the call information. Any changes made before the call is NOT saved.
Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Analog Options
Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options
One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Result Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch Selective Switch You hear any digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English Using the PL Defeat Feature
This feature allows you to override any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio will also unmute to any digital activity on a digital channel. Procedure:
Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat button in the PL Defeat position. You hear any activity on the channel. OR The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Using the Digital PTT ID Feature
This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)
Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 119 English Three variations of smart PTT are available:
Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Override Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or
(if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English IMPRES Battery Annunciator
This feature displays the current capacity and charges cycles of your battery when a IMPRES Battery is powering your radio. This feature must be enabled in your radio to see the information. The information shown are:
Rated Capacity Percentage of current battery capacity. Remaining Capacity Remaining power of the battery in mAh. Estimated Charges Number of charges cycles the battery has gone through.
Accessing the Battery Info screen Procedure:
1 < or > to Batt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Batt. The display shows the details of the battery. 3 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. Accessing the General Radio Information
Your radio contains information on the following:
Radio Information IP Display Control Assignments Soft ID (If Enabled) Note:
The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.
Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following information of your radio:
Host Version Secure Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version Option Board Type DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band Processor Version Option Board Serial Number
(optional)
(optional) Option Board Bluetooth Address (optional) Expansion Board Type
(optional) MFK Secondary Function Option Board Software Version
(optional) MFK Primary Function Note: Press H at any time to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 121 English Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows the Information screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English Viewing the IP Information
This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:
The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows the IP Info screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments
This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 11 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows the Control Map screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. Editing the Soft ID
This feature allows you to change your username. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:
Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Soft ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows the current Soft ID. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the current Soft ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 123 English 6 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Soft ID screen. Use the keypad to edit the text. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to save the new Soft ID and return to the previous screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English Voice Announcement
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum total duration for all voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note:
This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The features which Voice Announcement supports are:
Zone Channel Scan PL Disabled Talkaround/Direct Tx Inhibit Note: Voice announcements support certain number of zone-
channel, but not all. Seek advice from your dealer or qualified technician for the best selection of this feature. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:
High enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. Procedure:
You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button
(which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note: Pressing this preprogrammed playback button will always enable the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel remaining within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 125 English Acoustic Safety
!
C a u t i o n Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:
Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings.Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. Helpful Tips Take a moment to review the following:
Acoustic Safety . page 126 Caring for Your Radio . page 127 Cleaning Your Radio . page 128 Handling Your Radio . page 129 Servicing Your Radio . page 129 Taking Care of the Battery. page 130 Checking the Battery Charge Status . page 130 Battery Recycling and Disposal. page 131 s p T i l u f p e H l 126 English If you experience hearing discomfort, ringing in your ears, or muffled speech, you should stop listening to the radio through your headset or earpiece and have your hearing checked by your doctor. See www.motorola.com/hearingsafety for more information. Note: Your radio is preprogrammed to reset to medium volume rate, which is Level 12, by default whenever the radio powers up. Caring for Your Radio
!
C a u t i o n Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Never poke this vent with any objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers. This could create leak paths into the radio and the radios submergibility will be lost. l H e p f u l i T p s Vent Port Vent Port
(For APX 4000 R Radios Only) Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours. Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio. 127 English Cleaning Your Radio
To clean the external surfaces of your radio:
1 Combine one teaspoon of mild dishwashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-
bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. 3 Clean battery contacts with a lint-free cloth to remove dirt or grease.
!
C a u t i o n Do not use solvents to clean your radio as most chemicals may permanently damage the radio housing and textures. Do not submerge the radio in the detergent solution.
(For APX 4000 R Radios Only) Elastomer technology materials used for seals in rugged portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola recommends that rugged radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the watertight integrity of the radio. Motorola details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment needed to inspect, maintain and troubleshoot radio seals in the radios service manual. If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Otherwise, the water could short-circuit the radio. If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician.
!
C a u t i o n s p T i l u f p e H l 128 English Handling Your Radio
Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. Never carry the radio by the antenna. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Do not submerge the radio unless it is a ruggedized, APX 4000 R model. Avoid subjecting the radio to corrosives, solvents or chemicals. Do not disassemble the radio. Keep the accessory-connector cover in place until ready to use the connector. Replace the cover immediately once the accessory has been disconnected. When charging the radio using a wall mounted charger, the radio must be turned off. Otherwise, the Man Down Alert and Emergency may be accidentally triggered. l H e p f u l i T p s Servicing Your Radio
Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for an additional period of either one or two years beyond the normal expiration date of the standard warranty. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center at 3761 South Central Avenue, Rockford, IL 61102 (800) 227-6772 / (847)725-4200. 129 English Taking Care of the Battery Checking the Battery Charge Status
Your radio can indicate the batterys charge status through:
the LED and sounds. the fuel gauge icon on the display. You can also check the battery charge status via the menu entry. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 120 for more information. LED and Sounds
When your battery is low:
the LED blinks red when the PTT button is pressed. you hear a low-battery chirp (short, high-pitched tone).
Fuel Gauge Icon 0 A blinking fuel gauge icon (
) is displayed only when the battery voltage drops to low level. In this case, replace the battery with a fully charged one. s p T i l u f p e H l 130 English Gauge Battery Charge 76% to 100% full 51% to 75%
26% to 50%
11% to 25%
10% or less (at 10%, the gauge begins blinking) Battery Recycling and Disposal
In the U.S. and Canada, Motorola participates in the nationwide Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC) program for battery collection and recycling. Many retailers and dealers participate in this program. For the location of the drop-off facility closest to you, access RBRC's Internet web site at www.rbrc.com or call 1-800-8-
BATTERY. This internet site and telephone number also provide other useful information concerning recycling options for consumers, businesses, and governmental agencies. l H e p f u l i T p s 131 English Highlights for the Accessories 1 Only the following programming cables are compatible with APX 4000 radios. APX DMR Port Programming Cable (PMKN4012B) Test and Alignment Programming Cable (PMKN4013C) Accessories The accessory link below is for the family of products for APX. Not all accessories are FCC certified for operation with all APX models and/or bandsplits. Please refer to the specific subscriber APX price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX The certifications for the accessories are as below. UHF1 Band (FCC ID: AZ489FT4907 / 109U-89FT4907) 700/800 MHz Band (FCC ID: AZ489FT7050 / 109U-89FT7050) Bluetooth Enabled Models:
UHF1 Band (FCC ID: AZ489FT4905 / 109U-89FT4905) 700/800 MHz Band (FCC ID: AZ489FT7049 / 109U-89FT7049) s e i r o s s e c c A 132 English Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Take a moment to review the following:
Special Channel Assignments. page 133 Operating Frequency Requirements . page 134 Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel
If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:
1 2 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. 3 4 State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination State the nature of the distress. Specify what kind of assistance you need. State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 5 6 7 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. OVER. 9 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel
For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. A p p e n d i x
:
M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 133 English Operating Frequency Requirements Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:
on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:
in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 156.100 Receive 160.650 160.700 Channel Number 1 2 e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i
:
x d n e p p A 134 English Channel Number
*
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**
14 15**
16 17**
18 19 20
*
22 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 Receive 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Channel Number
*
24 25 26 27 28 60
*
62 63
*
65 66 67**
68 69 71 72 73 74 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725 Receive 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725 Channel Number Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive 75 76 77**
78 79 80
*
*
*
84 85 86 87 88
***
***
156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425
***
***
161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025
*
Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.
** Low power (1 W) only
*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. A p p e n d i x
:
M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 135 English Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. Term Definition ACK Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Acknowledgment of communication. Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 Trunking ASTRO Conventional Autoscan Bluetooth An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Bluetooth is an open wireless technology standard for exchanging data over short distances from fixed and mobile devices with high levels of security. Term Definition Bluetooth Pairing Call Alert Carrier Squelch Central Controller Channel Control Channel Bluetooth pairing occurs when two bluetooth devices exchanged a passkey to form a paired Bluetooth wireless connection. Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting
(turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/
receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-
way/data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. y r a s s o G l 136 English Term Definition Term Definition Conventional Conventional Scan List CP Cursor Deadlock Digital Private Line (DPL) Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater (see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Codeplug A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing l G o s s a r y Dynamic Regrouping DSR EID ESN Failsoft FCC FM Hang Up Home screen IV & D A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Dynamic System Resilience Encrypted Integrated Data Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Integrated Voice and Data 137 English Term Definition Term Definition KVL LCD LED LiIon Man Down MDC Menu Entry Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display. Light-emitting diode. Lithium ion. A life-saving feature that senses the radio user may be in trouble by monitoring the whether the radio is in a vertical or horizontal position or whether the radio is motionless. When this feature is triggered, the radio alerts the user with audio and visual alerts. It can also trigger Emergency Alarm the Post-Alert Timer is not cancelled. Motorola Data Communication A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the {, |, and
} buttons. Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A knob which works as power on off buttons, volume change and/or different types of mode change controller A scan list that can include both talkgroups
(trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Nickel-metal-hydride. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-the-air rekeying. A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. Monitor Multi-Function Knob Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code NiMH Non-Tactical/
Revert OTAR Page y r a s s o G l 138 English Definition Term Personality PIN Preprogrammed Refers to a software feature that has been A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number Private
(Conversation) Call Private Line
(PL) Programmable PTT Radio Frequency (RF) Repeater activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk the PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. Term Definition Selective Call Selective Switch Squelch SSI Standby Status Calls Tactical/
Non-Revert Talkaround A feature that allows you to call a select individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. Synchronous Serial Interface An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. l G o s s a r y 139 English Term Definition Term Definition Talkgroup TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users
(see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich
(up to 180 degrees) is later in time;
everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =
Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. A grouping of channels. UTC Zone y r a s s o G l 140 English Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below
(Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
ASTRO APX 4000 Portable Units Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y 141 English INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 142 English D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G)Rechargeable batteries if:
(1) any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.
(2) the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H)Freight costs to the repair depot. I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K) Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;
B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y 143 English y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 144 English Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2011 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. November 2011.
*68012004058*
68012004058-A
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Users Guide | Users Manual | 2.07 MiB | March 11 2014 |
APX TWO-WAY RADIOS User Guide Contents Documentation Copyrights...........14 Declaration of Conformity.........................7 Disclaimer.......................................15 Important Safety Information..........9 Software Version............................10 Canada)....................................................10 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Consignes de scurit importantes.................................11 Version logicielle........................... 12 Canada)....................................................12 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Computer Software Copyrights....13 Getting Started...............................16 How to Use This Guide..................................16 Notations Used in This Manual......................16 Additional Performance Enhancement.......... 17 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.................17 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR).... 17 CrossTalk Prevention..........................17 SecureNet...........................................17 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................17 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......19 Charging the Battery......................................19 Attaching the Battery..................................... 19 Attaching the Antenna................................... 20 Removing and Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover...................................... 21 English C o n t e n t s 1 Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 22 Turning On the Radio.................................... 23 Adjusting the Volume.....................................25 Identifying Radio Controls............27 Radio Parts and Controls...............................27 Programmable Features................................28 Assignable Radio Functions............... 28 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions....................................... 31 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.....31 Menu Select Buttons...........................32 Home Button.......................................32 4-Way Navigation Button.................... 32 Data Feature Button............................32 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................33 Identifying Status Indicators.........35 Status Icons...................................................35 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.....37 TMS Status Icons................................37 TMS Menu Options.............................39 Call Type Icons..............................................39 s t n e t n o C 2 English LED Indicator.................................................39 Top Lightbar Indicator....................................41 Intelligent Lighting Indicators......................... 42 Alert Tones.................................................... 43 Phone Call Displays and Alerts..................... 46 General Radio Operation...............48 Selecting a Zone............................................48 Selecting a Radio Channel............................ 48 Mode Select Feature..................................... 49 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey...........................................49 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Keypad Button............................... 50 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 50 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call................................50 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)...........51 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).....52 Making a Radio Call.......................................52 Making a Talkgroup Call..................... 52 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 53 Making an Enhanced Private Call
(Trunking Only).............................. 54 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 55 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button...................................... 56 Monitor Feature............................................. 56 Monitoring a Channel..........................56 Monitoring Conventional Mode........... 57 Advanced Features........................58 Advanced Call Features................................ 58 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)........................ 58 Talkgroup Call Feature
(Conventional Operation Only)...... 59 Sending a Status Call......................... 59 Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only).............................................. 60 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....61 Contacts.........................................................63 Making a Private Call from Contacts...63 Adding a Contact to a Call List............64 Removing a Contact from a Call List................................................. 64 Viewing Details of a Contact...............65 Scan Lists...................................................... 65 Viewing a Scan List.............................65 Editing the Scan List........................... 66 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status.............................................67 Scan...............................................................67 Turning Scan On or Off.......................67 Making a Dynamic Priority Change
(Conventional Scan Only)..............68 Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 68 Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 68 Call Alert Paging............................................69 Receiving a Call Alert Page................ 69 Sending a Call Alert Page...................69 Emergency Operation....................................71 Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 72 Sending an Emergency Call
(Trunking Only).............................. 72 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call............................. 73 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm.... 73 Change of Channels during Emergency.....................................74 Emergency Keep-Alive Feature..........74 C o n t e n t s 3 English Man Down......................................................74 Pre-Alert Timer....................................76 Post-Alert Timer..................................76 Radio Alerts When Man Down Feature is Triggered...................... 76 Triggering Emergency.........................76 Radio Alerts When Man Down Enhanced is Triggered...................77 Exiting Man Down Feature..................77 Re-Initiating Man Down.......................78 Testing the Man Down Feature...........78 Automatic Registration Service (ARS)...........78 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode..............................................79 User Login Feature............................. 79 Text Messaging Service (TMS)..................... 80 Sending a Quick Text Message..........81 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message................. 82 Secure Operations.........................................87 Selecting Secure Transmissions.........87 Selecting Clear Transmissions........... 88 Managing Encryption.......................... 88 Global Positioning System (GPS)..................92 GPS Operation....................................93 GPS Performance Enhancement........94 The Outdoor Location Feature
(Using GPS)...................................94 MGRS Coordinates.............................95 Trunking System Controls............................. 98 Using the Failsoft System................... 98 Out-of-Range Radio............................99 Site Trunking Feature......................... 99 Locking and Unlocking a Site..............99 Site Display and Search Button........ 100 Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth-.......... 100 Turning the Bluetooth On..................101 Turning the Bluetooth Off..................101 Re-Pair Timer....................................102 Bluetooth Drop Timer........................103 Pairing with Low Frequency-
Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-
MPP) Feature.............................. 104 Radio Indications of Lost Bluetooth Connection...................................106 Standard Pairing Feature..................106 PIN Authentication in Pairing............ 109 Turning On the Bluetooth Audio
(Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset)..................111 Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio
(Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio)..................112 s t n e t n o C 4 English Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device....... 112 Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information.......................112 Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information...................................113 Programming Over Project 25 (POP 25)
(ASTRO 25 and ASTRO Conventional). 114 Responding to the Notification of Upgrade....................................... 114 Voice Announcement...................................115 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..............116 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site...............................................117 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites.............................................117 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites............................. 118 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site....................................118 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites.............................................119 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites............................. 120 Utilities......................................................... 120 Viewing Recent Calls........................120 Selecting the Power Level................ 121 Selecting a Radio Profile...................122 Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias............................................. 122 Selecting the Audio Speaker.............123 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 123 Setting Up the Radio Display and Visual Indicators to Suit Night Vision Goggles.............................124 Locking and Unlocking the Controls. 125 Turning the Controls and Buttons Tones On or Off........................... 125 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...........126 Using the Time-Out Timer.................126 Time and Date Setup........................127 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features......................128 Using the PL Defeat Feature............ 128 Digital PTT ID Support......................129 Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)............................................ 129 IMPRES Battery Annunciator............130 General Radio Information................130 Helpful Tips.................................. 133 Radio Care...................................................133 English C o n t e n t s 5 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 148 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 149 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................149 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.149 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................150 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 150 VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................152 VIII. For Australia Only:................................152 Cleaning Your Radio.........................134 Proper Ways to Handle the Radio.... 134 Radio Service and Repair.................134 Battery Care.................................................135 Battery Charge Status.......................135 Battery Recycling and Disposal........ 136 Accessories..................................137 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range..................... 138 Special Channel Assignments.....................138 Emergency Channel......................... 138 Operating Frequency Requirements............138 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............141 s t n e t n o C 6 Glossary........................................142 Limited Warranty..........................148 PRODUCTS........................................... 148 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: APX 4000/ APX 4000Li conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 7 English Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 8 English Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 9 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R13.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 130 to determine your radio software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of the Industry Canada rules per the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. i n o s r e V e r a w t f o S 10 English Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!
Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. i C o n s g n e s d e s c u r i t i m p o r t a n t e s 11 English Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R13.00.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et RSS 210 du rglement d'Industrie Canada selon les conditions numres ci-dessous:
Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par e l l i i e c g o l n o s r e V i 12 English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-
exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. C o m p u t e r S o f t w a r e C o p y r i g h t s 13 English Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. s t h g i r y p o C n o i t a t n e m u c o D 14 English Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. l i D s c a m e r i 15 English damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. Note: An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Phon Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX Portables. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. Warning: An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. Caution: An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 16 English Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. CrossTalk Prevention G e This feature prevents crosstalk scenario from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the Trident Transmitting SSI clock rate in the radio to be varied from the Receiving Frequency. This subsequently reduced the possibilities of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator for the correct radio settings, if the radio is to be operated in extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C), to ensure proper top and front display operation. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:
t t i n g S a r t t e d 17 English Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?
Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?
What optional accessories may suit your needs?
d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 English Preparing Your Radio for Use The LED on the charger indicates the charging progress; see the charger user guide. This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for your. Attaching the Battery Charging the Battery Warning: To avoid a possible explosion:
Do not replace the battery in any area labeled hazardous atmosphere. Do not discard batteries in a fire. The Motorola-approved battery shipped with your radio is uncharged. Prior to using a new battery, charge it for a minimum of 16 hours to ensure optimum capacity and performance. For a list of Motorola-authorized batteries and chargers available for use with your radio, see Accessories on page 137. Note:
When charging a battery attached to a radio, turn the radio off to ensure a full charge. To charge the battery, place the battery (with or without the radio), in a Motorola-approved charger. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f You can view the status of the IMPRES battery if the radio is using an IMPRES battery. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 130 for more information. 1 Slide the battery into the radio frame until the latch which is at the bottom of the radio clicks into place. o r U s e 19 English e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 20 2 To remove the battery, lift up the latch which is at the bottom of the radio, then slide the battery out from the radio. Note: When removing the battery, ensure that the radio is turned off. Attaching the Antenna Ensure the radio is turned off before attaching the antenna. 1 Set the antenna in its receptacle. 2 Turn the antenna clockwise to attach to the radio. English A 3 To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. Note:
When removing the antenna, ensure that the radio is turned off. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e Removing and Attaching the Accessory Connector Cover The accessory connector is located on the antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect accessories to the radio. Note: To prevent damage to the connector, shield it with the connector cover when not in use. 1 To remove the accessory connector cover, rotate counterclockwise until it the thumbscrew disengages from the radio. Note: If the thumbscrew is too tight, use an Allen wrench at to loosen it first. 21 English 2 Rotate and lift the connector cover to disengage it from the radio. 3 To attach the accessory connector cover, insert of the cover into the slot above the hooked end the connector. 4 Press downward on the covers top to seat it in the slot. 5 Once in place, tighten by rotating the thumbscrew clockwise by hand. Attaching the Belt Clip 1 Align the grooves of the belt clip with those of the radio and push down until you hear a click. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 22 English ABC P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f 2 To remove the clip, use a flatbladed object to
) away from the radio. press the belt clip tab (
Then, slide the clip upward and away from the radio. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Control Knob until the radio display lights on, then release the knob. o r U s e 23 English A If the power-up test is successful, you see momentary SELFTEST on the radios display, followed by the Home screen. If the power-up test is unsuccessful, you see Error XX/YY (XX/YY is an alphanumeric code). Note: If the radio fails to power-up after repeating a few times, record the Error XX/YY code and contact your dealer. 2 To turn off the radio, press and hold the Control Knob until the radio display shows Power off?, press the Menu Select button below Yes to power off. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 24 English Adjusting the Volume Ensure the radio is power on and the main speaker
(
) is pointed towards you for increased loudness and intelligibility, especially in areas with loud background noises. Your radio is preprogrammed to reset to medium volume rate, which is Level 12, by default whenever the radio powers up. 1 To increase the volume, rotate the Multi Function Knob (
) clockwise. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 25 English 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. The display shows volume bars and volume level when you change the volume. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 26 English A Identifying Radio Controls Radio Parts and Controls I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16Poition Select Knob1 On/Off/Volume Control Knob Top Lightbar Top Side (Select) Button1 Microphone Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Side Button 11 Side Button 21 27 English 11614121110923467813151752221201918 Home Button 9 4-Way Navigation Button 10 Data Feature Button 11 12 Menu Select Buttons 13 Main Display 14 15 16 17 Speaker Bluetooth Pairing Location Indicator LED Battery Latch (at the bottom)Top (Orange) Button1 Antenna Accessory Connector Battery Latch Battery 18 19 20 21 22 Microphone Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or qualified radio technician using the radio's programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:
Pressing and releasing rapidly. Press Long Press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 28 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. English Call Response Channel Contacts Dynamic Priority
(Conventional Only) Emergency Information Internet Protocol Address Location Allows you to answer a private call. Selects a channel. Selects the Contacts menu. Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Displays the information of the radio. Display the Internet Protocol
(IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Determines the current location
(latitude, longtitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all location. Message Mode Select Monitor
(Conventional Only) Multiple Private Line
(Conventional Only) Nuisance Delete Phone Enters the current message list. Long-press programs a button with the current zone and channel of the radio; once programmed, the short-press of that button changes the radio zone channel to the programmed zone and channel. Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 29 English Private Call
(Trunking Only) Private Line Defeat
(Conventional Only) Radio Profiles Recent Calls Repeater Access Button (RAB)
(Conventional Only) Reprogram Request
(Trunking Only) Request-To-Talk
(Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Overrides any coded squelch
(DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Allows for easy access t a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Allows to manually send a repeater access codeword. Notifies the dispatcher you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Notifies the dispatcher you want to send a voice call. Scan Scan List Programming Secure Transmission Select
(Conventional and Trunking) Selective Call
(Conventional Only) Site Display/
Search (Trunking Only) Site Lock/Unlock
(Trunking Only) Status Toggles scan on or off. Selects the scan list for editing
(by long press on the Scan button). Toggles the Secure Transmission On or Off when the Secure/Clear Strapping fields is set to Select for the current channel and when the radio is model/option capable. Calls an assigned radio. Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Locks onto a specific site. Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 30 English Talkaround/Direct
(Conventional Only) Talkgroup
(Conventional Only) Text Messaging Service (TMS) TMS Quick Text User Zone Select Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Selects the text messaging menu. Selects a predefined message. Automatically registers with the server. Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Keypad/Controls Lock Light/Flip Locks or unlocks the keypad, programmable buttons, switches or rotary knobs. Press the button to toggle the display backlight on or off;
press and hold the button to reverse the content of the top display. Voice Announcement Voice Mute Volume Set Tone Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Toggles voice mute on or off. Sets the volume set tone. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select and Navigation buttons. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 31 English ABCDE A B C D E Softkeys Menu Select Buttons Data Feature Button 4Way Navigation Button Home Button Menu Select Buttons Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Use the Menu Select button to access the menu entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. Home Button button returns you to the Home Pressing the
(default) screen. In most cases, this is the current button is mode. For selected radio features, the also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note: Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 32 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 33 English A The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic purposes:
While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 52 for more information. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 34 English Identifying Status Indicators Status Icons The 160 x 90 pixel front liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The top two display rows contain color icons that indicate radio operating conditions. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Battery For IMPRES battery operation only the icon shown indicates the charge remaining in the battery. For all battery operation the icon blinks when the battery is low. Received Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. Roaming The radio has roamed to and is currently registered to a foreign system. Direct On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication
(during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored
(during conventional operation only). I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 35 English In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. or Power Level L Radio is set at Low power. H Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation Secure operation. Clear operation. On Off Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is available. Off Feature is disabled. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 36 English Inverted Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the radio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Bluetooth On Bluetooth is on and ready for Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth is currently connected to the external Bluetooth device. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Message Unsent 37 English The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 38 English TMS Menu Options Menu Option Sel Send Yes Description/Function Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. Call Type Icons The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. Mobile number added to a Call List. I d e n Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. Incoming emergency call. i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Radio number. LED Indicator Radio number added to a Call List. The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Mobile number. 39 English Blinking red Double blinking red Rapidly blinking red Solid yellow
(Conventional Only) Blinking yellow Solid green Blinking green Radio is transmitting at low battery condition. Radio is in Emergency Mode. Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Channel is busy. Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i Solid red Radio is transmitting. 40 English A Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Note: No LED indication when the radio receives a clear (non-secured) transmission in trunking Mode. LED indication can be preprogramed by qualified technician to be permanently disabled. Consult your dealer for further details if you need it to be disabled. Top Lightbar Indicator I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s The Top Lightbar indicates the status of Intelligent Lighting. The lightbar turn into solid color of orange, red or green depending on the status of Intelligent Lighting. See Intelligent Lighting Indicators on page 42for different status of Intelligent Lighting. 41 English A Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporary changes the color of the Top Lightbar and adds a color bar to the main display screen to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange Notification When Emergency Alerts s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 42 English Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio initiates the Man Down Post-Alert timer. The radio initiates Fireground Evacuation alarm. The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios condition. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Short, Low-
Pitched Tone Long, Low-
Pitched Tone Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Man Down Entry Time-Out Timer Timed Out After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. When radio initiates Man Down mode.
(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 43 English You Hear A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medium-
Pitched Tone Long, Medium-
Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-
Pitched Tones Tone Name Out of Range Invalid Mode Busy Heard
(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. When system is busy. When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm /Call Entry Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When entering the emergency state. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 44 English You Hear Short, High-
Pitched Tone
(Chirp) Ringing Gurgle Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit Unique, Low-
Pitched Chirp New Message Tone Name Keyfail Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Low-Battery Chirp Heard When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. When Call Alert or Private Call is received. When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When battery is below preset threshold value. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.
(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.
(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for accepting its transmissions. When a new message is received. 45 English You Hear Unique, High-
Pitched Chirp Incremental-
Pitched Tone Decremental-
Pitched Tone A Group of Very High-
Pitched Tones Doh-Sol Sol-Doh Tone Name Priority Status Heard When a priority message is received. Bluetooth Paired Bluetooth Connected Bluetooth Unpaired Bluetooth Disconnected Man Down Continuous Tone Critical Man Down Continuous Tone Enhanced Zone Bank Up When Bluetooth accessory is paired with the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is connected to the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is unpaired from the radio. When Bluetooth accessory is disconnected from the radio. When radio is in Man Down mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. When radio is in Man Down Enhanced mode and prepares to transmit Emergency Alarm when the timer of this alarm ends. When EZB Up button is pressed to scroll the Enhance Zone Bank up. Enhanced Zone Bank Down When EZB Down button is pressed to scroll the Enhance Zone Bank down. Phone Call Displays and Alerts The following phone call displays and alerts appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 46 English You Hear A Long Tone You See No phone Phone busy When You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. The phone system is busy. Press Notes Press Home screen. A Busy Tone Phone busy No acknowledge When a channel is not available. The call is not acknowledged. A High- Pitched Tone When you release the PTT button. to hang up. The radio returns to the to exit the phone mode and try your call later. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. to hang up. The radio returns to the Press Home screen. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 47 English General Radio Operation Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. The following methods are options on how to select a radio zone. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone via the preprogrammed Zone (3-
Position A/B/C) switch:
a) Move the preprogrammed Zone (3-Position A/B/C) switch to the position of the required zone. If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step A. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the displayed zone. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Select a zone via the radio menu Zone:
or to Zone. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or c) d) Press the Menu Select button directly below to the required zone. Sel to confirm the displayed zone. e) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a zone via the radio menu ZnUp or ZnDn:
or to ZnUp or ZnDn. a) b) Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below ZnUp or ZnDn until the required zone appears. Positions of ZnUp and ZnDn on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Read carefully before you press. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. 49 English Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs. The following methods are options on how to select a radio channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel via the preprogrammed 16 Position Select Knob to the desired channel. a) Rotate the preprogrammed 16Position Select Knob to the desired channel. b) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel via the Channel radio menu. a) b) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel via Channel Up or Channel Down radio menu:
a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below to ChUp or ChDn. or ChUp or ChDn. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 50 English Positions of ChUp and ChDn on the display may differ each time you release the Menu Select button. Read carefully before you press. c) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone and channel. Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save your radios current zone and channel to a programmable button, keypad button or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:
Softkeys Programmable buttons Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note: To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Keypad Button You can save the frequent used zone and channel to the programmable buttons. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note: Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 51 English transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 54 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio triggers for your attention with one of the following scenarios depending on the system your radio is configured:
For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The transmitting radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note: With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the transmitting radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the call received icon blinks. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. Press theCall Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 52 English If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release thePTT button to listen. display shows Phone Call and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or theCall Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. 3 Press or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 54 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call
(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note: With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there are no response to the call after the timer expires your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 56 for details on making a Private Call. Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:
The preprogrammed Zone switch. The 16-Position Select Channel Knob. A preprogrammed One Touch Call button. The Contacts list (see Viewing Details of a Contact on page 66.) Note: The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 53 English left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Turn the 16-Position Select Channel Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 54 English Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) 1 Perform one of the following actions:
To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. The display shows Calling... <Number>. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert Page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 70 for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. The display shows Calling... <Number>. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 55 English When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 56 English 2 or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. or to the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. See Phone Call Displays and Alerts on page 48 for more information if your call is not answered. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the followings:
Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to Dir then press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). G e n e r a l Monitor Feature Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. This digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel The following methods are options on how to monitor a channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Monitoring a Channel with Volume Set button. a) Select the desired zone and channel. b) Press and hold the Volume Set button to hear the volume set tone. i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 57 English Monitoring Conventional Mode Your radio may be preprogrammed to receive Private-
Line (PL) calls. 1 Momentarily press the Monitor button to listen for activity. The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display. 2 Press and hold the Monitor button to set continuous monitor operation. The duration of the button press is programmable. 3 Press the Monitor button again, or the PTT button, to return to the original squelch setting. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. c) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. d) Release the Volume Set button. e) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. f) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). Monitoring a Channel with Monitor button. a) Press the preprogrammed Monitor button. b) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. c) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. d) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). The Carrier Squelch indicator appears on the display when you monitor a channel via the preprogrammed Monitor button. Monitoring a Channel via the selected zone channel. a) Select the desired zone and channel. b) Listen for a transmission. c) Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. d) Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G e) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). 58 English Advanced Features Advanced Call Features Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, the radio prompts you with one the following indication scenario:
you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow to indicate the transmitting radio is still sending signal. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. The LED blinks solid green once to indicate the transmitting radio is pending to receive signal. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Selective Call 1 Perform one of the following actions:
To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 59 English or to the required ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note: Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 97 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to Sel to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 2 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note: The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to Sts and press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. or to the required status. 2 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received . The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-
pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature
(Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note: If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a Gurgle tone and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 61 English Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows Reprgrm rqst and Please wait. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories:
to cancel and t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Select Enabled Select Disabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store the frequent used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <Dynamic Zone Channels>. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <Dynamic Zone Channels>
shown on the screen. If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 3 or to Sel. The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Select Chan screen. or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Channel updated. 4 Press theMenu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 63 English The display shows the dynamic channels list. 2 or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>+Blank. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context
(conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:
Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note: Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 2 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. 4 or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to select the call type. 5 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 or to Sel. or to the required Call List and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add to the Call List, or Cncl to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows momentary Please wait before showing <Entry> added to Call List, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Removing a Contact from a Call List 1 or to Sel. The display shows Remove <Entry> frm Call List?. 65 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to remove the entry from the Call List, or No to cancel and return to the main display of Contacts. The display shows momentary Please wait before showing <Entry> removed from Call List, confirming the removal of the contact from the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Viewing Details of a Contact 1 2 3 or to Cnts then press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to view and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to View and press the Menu Select or button directly below Sel. The display shows all the numbers associated with the entry. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/ groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/
group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:
Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Please refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to ScnL then press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. or to view the members on the list. 3 Press to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English Editing the Scan List This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). or to ScnL then press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. or to the entry you want to edit. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/ or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions: to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat 3. Otherwise proceed to next step. Use the 16-Position Select knob to select the to the desired channel. or channel. 5 Perform one of the following actions:
Move the Scan List Programming switch out of programming position. Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 68 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Long press the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button (side button). Move the preprogrammed Scan List Programming switch to programming position. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 67 English The display shows the programming mode icon and the first list member. or to the member you want to edit. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:
or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the 16-Position Select knob to select another scan list member. 5 Move the Scan List Programming switch out of to exit scan list programming position. Press programming and return to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:
s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:
A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-
One channel, regardless of traffic on non-
priority channels. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Scan button to toggle Scan On or Scan Off to initiate or stop scan. Turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan then press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. When the radio locks onto the channel designated as the new Priority-Two channel, press the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. 69 English When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Nuisance Delete button. or to Nuis and press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, or when you press the PTT button. Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Restoring a Nuisance Channel Receiving a Call Alert Page To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:
Turn the radio off and then turning it on again. Stop and restart a scan via the preprogrammed Scan button or menu. Change the channel via the 16-Position Select knob. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 54 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 54 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page The following methods are options on how to send a call alert page. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Note: The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page via the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:
a) Press the preprogrammed Quick Access
(One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu Page:
or to Page. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below to the Cnts to view the required ID, required ID. or d) Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu Call:
or to Call. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. or c) to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 71 English If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. d) To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes. To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No. The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear a tone and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen of Contacts. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Top (Orange) button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:
Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Silent Emergency Alarm Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Each channel can only assigned one of the Emergency modes above. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel. Note: To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:
t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Tactical/Non-
Revert The radio sends emergency alarm and/or make emergency call on the current selected channel. Non-Tactical/
Revert for Conventional system The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send alarm and/or make emergency call. The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency talkgroup to send alarm and/or make emergency call. Non-Tactical/
Revert for Trunking system Man Down is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature on the condition the Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. See Man Down on page 79 on page 73 for details. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Note: Emergency button press timer by default is set to 1 second. This timer is programmable from 0 6 seconds by a qualified technician. Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:
The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short medium-
pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s When you receive the dispatchers acknowledgment, the display shows Ack received. You hear four tones, the alarm ends, and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows No acknowledge. The alarm ends when the timer expires and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 73 English One of the following scenarios will occur:
The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short medium-
pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:
You receive the dispatchers acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgement. The display shows No acknowledge. You press the PTT button while in the Emergency Alarm mode. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
You press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode. Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. Change of Channels during Emergency A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s For ALL Emergency transmissions, when changing channels:
If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is not preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. Emergency Keep-Alive Feature This feature, when enabled, prevents the radio from being turned off via the On/Off Control Knob when the radio is in the Emergency state. 75 English Note: The radio only exits the Emergency state using one of the ways mentioned in the previous sections. See Sending an Emergency Alarm on page 73, Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) on page 73, Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call on page 74, or Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm on page 75. Fireground (Conventional Only) The portable Fireground Communications System is designed for deployment at an incident scene. It consists of five central components:
Your APX portable radios Incident Management Software Incident Management Software Radio Frequency (RF) Modem DVRS (Optional) These components provide on-scene and inbuilding radio coverage, and enhanced personnel accountability and monitoring. The radio helps to indicate your presence on the scene if it is in the range of the Incident Commander command terminal. Each Fireground Communication System radio automatically reports your radio ID on the commander mobile command terminal. Your name, riding position and sector are all can be configured to be seen at the Commanders command terminal. If you have a critical situation, you can press the Emergency button which activates an alarm on the Incident Management Software at the command terminal. The Fireground signals transmission is always exchanging data between your radio and the RF Modem and command terminal. The status of your radio includes:
Powering up or down the radio Automatic response to Polling Response to Evacuation commands Pressing the PTT button to make voice transmission Sending an Emergency Alarm and Call Entering Fireground Zone Channel 1 Upon powering up, perform one of the following actions:
t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English If the Fireground Zone Channel is set as default, you hear gurgle tone and the home screen. You are in Fireground zone channel. If the Fireground Zone Channel is set as default, but you hear a short, low-pitched tone, the display shows Reg failed to indicate that the command terminal does not respond to Fireground Zone Channel. Get a qualified technician for assistance. If your home channel is not Fireground Zone Channel, toggle or change the radio zone channel to Fireground Zone Channel. 2 Listen for a transmission. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press and hold the preprogrammed Volume Set button to hear the volume set tone. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. Release the Volume Set button. At the desired Fireground zone and channel, press the preprogrammed Monitor button and listen for activity. Adjust the Volume Control Knob if necessary. If your radio is working in Fireground Zone Channel, proceed to next step. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The LED lights up solid red while transmitting. Talk into the microphone clearly if needed. 5 Release the PTT button to receive. You hear a Transmit End Tone. Responding to Evacuation Indicator When Incident Commander triggers Evacuation signal from his command terminal, the RF Modem updates everyone in the Fireground Communication System with the order to evacuate the incident site. Your radio sounds the Evacuation Tone at the profile maximum alert tone volume level. The display shows EVACUATE. Perform one of the following actions:
Move the Volume Control Knob to adjust the volume of the Evacuation Tone from full volume. Perform any action on the radio other than volume adjustments to cancel the evacuation indications and update the command terminal. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 77 English If preprogrammed with Manual Acknowledgement of Evacuation Command, pressing the PTT button shall cancel the indications and acknowledge the command terminal. Tactical Public Safety(TPS) (Conventional Only) TPS enabled the user of a group to identify a transmission starts and ends clearly by displaying the caller name or ID on the radio display. Using TPS Normal Transmission At TPS Zone Channel, perform one of the following actions:
Press PTT button to transmit. Talk clearly into the microphone. Release PTT button to listen. Receive and listen to call, the radio displays the callers name or ID. Using TPS Emergency Transmission The following are two important alert tones designed for this feature. Emergency Beacon Emergency Call De-Key Sidetone During Emergency if the TPS radio user pushes the Emergency button, the radio sounds a Beacon at the maximum volume of the radio at radios internal speaker and it is not adjustable. This beacon goes to silent when user presses the PTT button for voice transmission. The radio sounds an alert tone to remind radio user that the Emergency Mode is still active after user releases the PTT button for an Emergency call transmission. The volume of loudness depends on the maximum tone at your radio profile. 1 Press the Emergency button to enter Emergency Mode. You hear Emergency Beacon. 2 Press PTT button to make Emergency Call. 3 Release to listen. You hear Emergency Call De-Key Sidetone. After a short pause, you hear Emergency Beacon. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English 4 Long press Emergency button to exit Emergency mode and cancel Emergency Beacon. Man Down Man Down condition is determined based upon the radio tilt angle or a combination of radio tilt angle and the lack of radio motion. Man Down feature is an alternate way to activate the Emergency feature if Emergency has been programmed in your radio. Note: This feature could be preprogrammed for all channels that support Emergency feature or could be preprogrammed specifically to a zone and channel which has Emergency feature. Consult your agent or qualified technician for more details. Your radio automatically activates Emergency Alarm or Call when the radio achieves or passes a tilt angle threshold or a combination of the angle threshold and radio motion below the motion sensitivity level, depending upon how the radio is programmed. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. Note: It is recommended that an Emergency button is preprogrammed in order to allow the user to exit the emergency condition. The Man Down feature provides a Clear function to the user. After a Man Down condition has been detected, the user can press a preprogrammed Clear button or preprogrammed Menu Select button to cancel the Man Down condition. The radio remains in the Man Down state without triggering an emergency condition until the radio is moved out of the Man Down state, at which point Man Down functionality resumes. The Man Down feature has three phases:
1 The radio senses the Man Down condition and Pre-Alert Timer is initiated. 2 Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Pre-Alert Timer field. At the end of this time, the radio alerts the user on the Man Down status with an audible alert tone and Man-Down text on the screen.Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Pre-
Alert Timer field. At the end of this time, the radio alerts the user on the Man Down status with an audible alert tone and text on the screen. The Post-Alert Timer also initiates at this point. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 79 English 3 Man Down condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. Once the timer expires, the Emergency alarm is transmitted. The Man Down Clear function is used in this phase to cancel the Man Down condition. The following scenarios affect the timers:
Pressing the PTT button suspends the Man Down timers; releasing the PTT button reinitiates the Pre-Alert Timer. Pressing other buttons on the radio does not impact these timers. Repositioning the radio exits the Man Down feature, which stops and resets the timers. Pressing a preprogrammed Clear button or pressing a Menu Select button preprogrammed for Clear stops and resets the timers. The timers do not restart until the radio is repositioned. Note: Emergency must be set up for this feature to operate. For details on operating the Emergency alerts, please see Emergency Operation on page 72. If the radio is preprogrammed to horizontal only, it must be worn in a vertical position otherwise the Man Down alert may be inadvertently triggered. When the radio is programmed with Man Down feature, special care is required when charging the radio with a wall mounted charger. See Proper Ways to Handle the Radio on page 146 for details. Pre-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time that a Man Down condition must be present before the radio-user is warned of the Man Down condition. When the radio detects that it has returned to the vertical position or when the radio detects motion, the Pre-Alert timer stops and is reset. The Pre-Alert timer reinitiates when the radio detects it is in the horizontal position or motionless again. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Man Down condition before the Emergency alarm is transmitted. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio alerts the user with an audible tone and displays the Man-Down text. See Exiting Man Down Feature on page 82 to exit Man Down feature. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Radio Alerts When Man Down Feature is Triggered Radio Alerts When Man Down Enhanced is Triggered The Man Down alert tone volume is directly related to the radios volume. Ensure that the radios volume is loud enough so that the user does not miss the Post-
Alert tone. Note: If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio including the Man Down tones. Triggering Emergency When the user does not clear the Man Down condition and the Post-Alert Timer comes to an end, Emergency Alarm or call is triggered. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. The radio also sends ID number and GPS coordinates to dispatcher if these features are enabled. User can exit Emergency following the Emergency procedure. See Emergency Operation on page 72 for details. Note: At this point the Man Down features is complete. Use normal Emergency procedures to cancel Emergency transmissions. Note: This feature is to be preprogrammed specifically to a zone and channel which supports Emergency feature. The volume and repetition duration of Man Down Enhanced alert tone could be customized and preprogrammed to suite the required situation. Consult your agent or qualified technician for more details. When the radio initiates Man Down Enhanced, you hear the Critical Man Down Continuous alert tone from the radio speaker. The volume of this tone is set to the louder of the preprogrammed minimum level or the current radio speaker level. This acts as a beacon to find the radio. Note: If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the alert tone can be heard from the radio speaker. Once the alert tone is active, changing to another channel with different setup triggers a different response from the radio as described next. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 81 English The alert tone is inhibited when you change to a channel without Emergency feature. The alert tone is inhibited when you change to a channel with Emergency but no Man Down feature. The current alert tone is inhibited and is replaced with a different alert tone when you change to a channel with Emergency and different Man Down configuration. The alert tone continues when you change to a channel with Emergency and similar Man Down configuration. Press the Menu Select button below Clr to exit. Re-Initiating Man Down After exiting the Emergency Operation when the radio is still in Man Down condition (tilted achieving threshold angle or motionless), user must first exit Man Down condition to then reinitiate the Man Down feature. Return the radio to the vertical position or shake the radio (when motion sensitivity is enabled). Exiting Man Down Feature Testing the Man Down Feature If you are not in a real Man Down situation, you should exit the Man Down feature and prevent emergency from going off with the following operation. Perform one of the following actions:
Repositioning the radio or shaking the radio
(when motion sensitivity is enabled). Press the preprogrammed Man Down Clear button to exit. Enable the Emergency feature with Silent Alarm disabled, but not in Surveillance Mode before running this test on the radio. 1 Turn the radio on and place in the vertical position, for at least 5 seconds. 2 Lay the radio down in the horizontal position. 3 Wait for alert tone. One of the following scenarios will occur:
t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English The radio alerts with audible tone and displays Man-Down. If no tone is heard, make sure that the Man Down feature is enabled on your radio. If Man Down feature was not enabled, please enable it and repeat step 1 to 3. If the Man Down feature is enabled and no tone is heard, send the radio to a qualified technician. Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:
ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note: The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. Selecting the ARS mode via the radio menu. a) or to Sel to confirm the displayed channel. User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note: A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 83 English Logging In as a User Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed User Login button. or to Sel to select the predefined user name. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. If the ID is invalid, the display shows momentary Invalid ID. One of the following scenarios occurs:
If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. Note: To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English Logging Out When you have logged in or you are using Offline mode, you can log out. Note: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. One of the following scenarios will occur:
The display shows Clear private data?. Proceed to the next step. If the Delete Messages On Session End feature is enabled, the radio clears the private data and returns to User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. Select No to keep your private data. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:
A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:
Compose Sent Note: See Status Icons on page 36 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 41 for more information on each menu option. Inbox Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. 4 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. You can select the required text from the Quick Text. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. or to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. 85 English 5 or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 7 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 8 Perform one of the following actions:
or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Note: The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message is important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate the message is important. or to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a reply. 87 English The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status icon. or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English The following methods are options on how to receive a text message. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message via the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:
a) When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Receiving a text message via the radio menu:
a) When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note:
more than one screen. or to read the message if the content fills 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Sel. or Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Sel. or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 2 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Rply, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Rply to reply the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note: The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 40 for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Replying to a Received Text Message Note: The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. The display shows a list of Quick Text. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. 89 English 4 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to send the message. 2 3 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Note: Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:
t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sel. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note: The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 40 for more information. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the current message. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Deleting All Text Messages 1 Perform one of the following actions:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Note: Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. Deleting a Text Message 1 From the Inbox or Sent screen, through the messages. or to scroll Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Messaging feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 or to Inbox or Sent then press the Menu Select button below Clr to select all messages in the selected folder. The display shows Del All?. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS feature screen. 91 English ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution The ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your data-enabled Motorola two-way radios. Federal mandate requires Two-Factor Authentication when querying Federal and State databases. With this advance messaging solution you have the ability enable Two-Factor Authentication. With Query and Two-Factor Authentication, you can use a secure system logon to initiate and receive key information on people, vehicles and properties when doing the regular security patrol. You can access to local or external databases such as the National Crime Information Center (NCIC), for "Hot Hits" on priors and warrants. Query and Two-Factor Authentication has Criminal Justice Information Services (CJIS) security compliance for queries. With this Advanced Messaging Solution, ARS functionality splits between two protocols:
ARS for Device Registration New User Authentication for User Login TMS functionality splits between two protocols:
TMS for messaging New Service Advertisement for service availabilities The radio with Two-Factor capabilities are backward compatible with the existing device registration system and TMS servers. System Setup for ASTRO Advanced Messaging Solution Your user name, unit ID and password all need to be provisioned in PremierOne. Your user account in PremierOne needs to be linked to an RSA account specifying a token to be used with the Two-Factor passcode. The radios caches the user name, unit ID and or Single Factor password in the codeplug, this allows the radio to automatically log in to use Single Factor authentication upon power up or mode change. The Two-Factor passcode is not stored in the codeplug. You can upgrade the Single Factor session to a Two-
Factor session by entering the Two-Factor passcode only. After an interruption (for example mode change, DSR switch over, power loss), the radio is capable of restoring the active session in its current state as long as the session is active in the server. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Note: Power loss and power down are different activities, power down occurs when the user intentionally powers off the radio, power loss is when the battery dies or is removed from the unit. Two-Factor Authentication Two-Factor Authentication is an extension of existing ARS and TMS operation. This feature allows you to authenticate yourself with a username, unit ID, password and passcode. The purpose of this feature is to allow the sender of a text message to address a specific user of the radio, so the message is delivered to the user, not to the radio which may have any user using it at the time. Secondly, this feature supports query authentication requirements so the query service knows which user originated a query. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note: A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. Logging in via the Two-Factor Authentication 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed User Login button. or to User, and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Perform one of the following actions:
or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type or edit a username. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined username. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined username. If the selected predefined username has more than the maximum allowed characters, or an 93 English invalid character in it, the display shows momentary Invalid ID. 3 For radio enabled with Unit ID, Perform one of the following actions:
or to [UnitID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type or edit a Unit ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined Unit IDs. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined Unit ID. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined Unit IDs at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined Unit ID. If the selected predefined Unit ID has more than the maximum allowed characters, or an invalid character in it, the display shows momentary Invalid UnitID. 4 Enter your password when you see a blinking cursor. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn or Ok. If only one-factor is enabled, the display shows 1F logged at the status. The login operation is complete. If login fails, the display shows momentary Login failed. The display returns to User Login screen. 6 For radio enabled with two-factor login, enter your passcode when you see a blinking cursor. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. The display shows In progress. If the login fails, the display shows momentary 2F pscd failed. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pscd to re-enter passcode. If successful, the display shows User Login screen with 2F logged in status to indicate Two-Factor Authentication complete. Logging out of Two-Factor Authentication Note: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. Radio which is successfully logged in to the secured system receives advertisement from the server that the access to the data for query is enabled. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. One of the following scenarios occurs:
The display shows Clear private data?. If the Delete Messages On Session End feature is enabled, the display shows momentary Private data cleared. 2 Select Yes to clear all your private data or select No to keep your private data. If you select Yes, the display shows momentary Private data cleared. Sending a Query This feature is available for radio users who have successfully logged in with the Two-Factor Authentication. Query is a special form of Quick Text marked with a flag that is replied or dispatched in normal TMS message. The query template needs to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s be configured in the quick test list of the CPS. You can choose from the quick text list, including queries if present. You shall receive a service advertisement message to indicate the Query is available after you have successfully logged in the radio with a Two-Factor Authentication. Note: The query server must be selected as the destination so that it can receive the query message and respond the query with text message. The query server must be an entry in the data user list in the CPS. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed TMS Query button and proceed to Step5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
95 English or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 5 or to Query and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 6 Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 8 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 9 Perform one of the following actions:
or to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. Note: The server responds to your query with the required report in text messages. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. Receiving a Query You shall receive the information you have requested in TMS format. When you receive a query, you hear a unique, high-
pitched chirp and the display shows the message icon flagged with Priority. The display shows momentary New msg. To access the Inbox, press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button or press the Menu Select button directly below TMS. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Selecting Secure Transmissions Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the secure position. Note: If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation, when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio will not transmit until you set the Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. Selecting Clear Transmissions A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Turn the preprogrammed Secure/Clear switch to the clear position. Note: If the selected channel is preprogrammed for secure-only operation, when you press the PTT button, you hear an invalid mode tone and the display shows Secure TX only. The radio will not transmit until you set the Secure/ Clear switch to the secure position. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or insecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. 97 English Managing Encryption Loading an Encryption Key Note: Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading, and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. 2 Select the required keys and press the Menu Select button directly below LOAD on the KVL. This loads the encryption keys into your radio. When the key has been loaded successfully, one of the following scenarios occurs:
You hear a short tone for single-key radios. You hear an alternating tone for multikey radios. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:
Conventional Multikey Trunked Multikey The encryption keys can be tied
(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-
group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-
selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to Key. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to scroll through the encryption keys. 3 4 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press
, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit. Note: When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. or to scroll through the keysets. 2 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. 99 English
, the PTT button, or the Exit menu Note: Press selection, or turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. The following methods are options on how to erase the selected encryption keys. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Erasing the selected encryption keys via the radio menu:
a) or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below to the desired encryption key. Optn. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English The display shows the available key erase options. d) or to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. e) Select Erase all keys? or Erase single key? by pressing the Menu Select button below Yes to erase the encryption key(s) in the radio. You can return to the previous screen by pressing the Menu Select button below No. Erasing the single key in radios with the single-key option and erasing all keys in radios with the multikey option via the preprogrammed Top Side
(Select) button and Top (Orange) button:
a) Press and hold the Top Side (Select) button. b) While holding Top Side (Select) button down, press the Top (Orange) button. The display shows Please wait. When all the encryption keys have been erased, the display shows All keys erased. Note: Do not press the Top (Orange) button before pressing the Top Side (Select) button, unless you are in an emergency situation as this sends an emergency alarm. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) is loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. 1 or to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the Home or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. Note: The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-
the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Powerup Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key
(UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all of the encryption keys is erased. Without this A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English UKEK key, the radio could not be over the air rekeyed. Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expands the speech while the noise flow Expander t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English Random FM Noise Canceller
(Flutter Fighter) remains the same at receiving radio. Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-
Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving in a transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Global Positioning System (GPS) This feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude or MGRS format per request from customers. The availability and accuracy of this location information
(and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. Once GPS is enabled, the radio displays the GPS icon on the screen. The dispatcher can always request the system to determine the real-time location coordinates of the radio. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location coordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:
Underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note: Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 20 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 103 English GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:
For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between a programmable waypoints and a preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:
Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination Note: The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. MGRS Coordinates This feature can only be enabled through CPS configuration. When the MGRS coordinate is enabled, all location coordinates are displayed in MGRS format, including the editable locations in GPS. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature Note: An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature to on or follow the following procedure to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
To obtain a location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below On . Press the Menu Select button directly below to Turn On GPS and press the Optn. Menu Select button directly below Sel. or The front display shows the MGRS or latitude/
longitude location, time, and date of the last successful location fix. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current location along with the UTC (Zulu) time and date that the location fix was obtained. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. If the radio fails to get a location fix, the display shows No service and returns to the previous display. 5 To return to the Home screen, press
, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 105 English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
or to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to 5. or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to 5. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:
The display shows Current loc saved as
<Waypoint name>. The display shows Current loc saved as
[Home]. The display shows Current loc saved as
[Destination]. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English 4 To return to the Home screen, press
, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
to scroll through the list. to select a waypoint to view the or or location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To view the MGRS or latitude/longitude location, time and date of the selected waypoint, or to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press preprogrammed GPS button.
, the PTT button, or the Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to desired waypoints. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below or Optn, Select button directly below Sel. to Del, and press the Menu Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows Delete <Waypoint name>
Confirm?. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <Waypoint name> deleted . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Note: You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 2 The display shows Delete All saved waypnts Confirm?. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. 107 English Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System 2 or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-
pitched tone and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue, in Failsoft, to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Rotate the Mode Knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. Your radio remains in this out-of-
range condition until it locks onto a control channel, it locks onto a failsoft channel, or it is turned off. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/
channel combination and Site trunking. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/
Unlock button. Follow the following procedure to lock and unlock a site via the radio menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site locked. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. 109 English Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. The display shows momentary the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Changing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:
Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Press and hold down the Menu Select button Displ/Srch button. directly below RSSI. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning site. 110 English When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Mission Critical Wireless - Bluetooth-
This feature allows your radio to extend its functionality by connecting to external proprietary Motorola accessories. Note: It is recommended to use Motorola proprietary Mission Critical Wireless (MCW) devices with APX radios during Mission Critical operations as other Bluetooth devices may or may not meet the mission critical standard. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. The use of this feature requires the "Full Feature"
expansion board together with the Bluetooth Software. The default setting for Bluetooth-enabled radio is Bluetooth ON. See Turning the Bluetooth Off on page 111 to turn the Bluetooth OFF. Currently your radio supports the following Bluetooth devices or profiles. Headset (HSP) Dial Up Networking (DUN) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Serial Port (SPP) Turning the Bluetooth On The following methods are options on how to turn the Bluetooth on. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turning the Bluetooth on via the radio menu BT:
or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. b) or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows Status On, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Turning the Bluetooth on via the preprogrammed button:
a) Press the preprogrammed button to turn on the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth on, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. Turning the Bluetooth Off The following methods are options on how to turn the Bluetooth off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turning the Bluetooth off via the radio menu BT:
or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. b) or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. 111 English The display shows Status Off, and disappears. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning the Bluetooth off via the preprogrammed button:
a) Press the preprogrammed button to turn off the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Bluetooth off and disappears. Re-Pair Timer There are two options for configuring the Bluetooth pairing type of the radio. The type defines the duration the radio and the accessory retain the pairing information. Immediate (For MCW accessories only.) When the radio and/or device is turned off after pairing, the keys are lost. Due to this, when your radio and your device are turned back on, they are unable to re-
connect. The user must re-pair the t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English Infinite Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate
(For MCW Accessories only) devices to re-establish a new set of pairing keys. See Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing
(LF-MPP) Feature on page 114 and Standard Pairing Feature on page 116.
(For all Bluetooth devices.) When the radio and/or device are turned off after pairing, keys are not lost. When the radio and the device are turned back on, they can resume the Bluetooth connection without user intervention. Re-Pair Timer Scenarios When the radio is powered off, pairing key is lost immediately, and accessory attempts to pair again. If pairing is unsuccessful within the Drop Timer value, the accessory automatically powers off. When the accessory is powered off, all keys are lost immediately, Re-Pair Timer Scenarios Re-Pair Timer Options and the user must re-pair the devices. When the device loses Bluetooth connection, the device will attempt to re-establish Bluetooth Connection within the Drop Timer value. When the radio is powered off, the accessory attempts to re-
establish the Bluetooth Connection for a period of time depending upon the Drop Timer value. If the device fails to reconnect within the period, the accessory then powers off. Infinite (For all Bluetooth devices) Bluetooth Drop Timer The Bluetooth Drop Timer has two different settings and functions, depending upon the selection of the Re-Pair Timer. Re-Pair Timer Options Immediate
(For MCW Accessories only) Infinite (For all Bluetooth devices) Description 0 15 minutes programmable buffer time to re-establish the Bluetooth Connection when the Bluetooth signal is out of range. If either device powers off, the pairing keys are immediately cleared from both devices and the devices must re-pair. This Timer only applies to the accessory. The programmable timer choices are: 0 15 minutes, 2 hours, 4 hours or 8 hours. Do note there are exceptions for Operation Critical Wireless (OCW) headset and PTT which are preprogrammed to 8 hours. This is a "stay alive" time that the accessory will remain on without the device reconnecting before powering off. The radio will remain on until the user powers the radio A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 113 English Re-Pair Timer Options Description Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing
(LF-MPP) Feature Ensure that Bluetooth feature of your radio is on and the Bluetooth tones are enabled. Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The range of Bluetooth operation is 10 meters line-of-
sight communication. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the signal transmitter (your off. The radio and accessory will remain paired indefinitely. Once the device re-connect, the timer is reset. The radio could not control the Drop Timer of Personal Area Networking (PAN), Dial-Up Networking
(DUN), Commercial Off- The-Shelf (COTS) and data services. It is depends on the specifications of these external devices. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information about these timers. To establish the Bluetooth Connection, see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-
MPP) Feature on page 114 or Standard Pairing Feature on page 116 . t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English radio) and the location of the receiver (your device or accessory). Obstacles that can cause an obstruction in the line-of-
sight include trees, buildings, mountains, cars and etc. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your accessory to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position the accessory and radio closer to each other (within the 10 meter defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Note: Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk Time power consumption, not the Standby Time consumption. Turn on the accessory. Then place it close to your radio aligning the Bluetooth Pairing Location (
) on the radio to the Bluetooth Pairing Location (a blue dot) on the accessory. If the pairing process is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The radio begins to connect to the device. Note: If the connection fails within 6 seconds, you hear a decremental-pitched tone to indicate that the device is unpaired. The display shows
<Device Type> unpaired. Repeat this step to re-initiate the pairing process. If the pairing process fails, you hear a short, low-
pitched tone. The display shows Bluetooth pairing failed. Repeat this step. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the connection is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> connected and the Bluetooth icon turns from to
. If the radio has the pairing record of the device and the connection fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> connect failed. 115 English Radio Indications of Lost Bluetooth Connection The radio shows connection. Below is the scenario and radio indications when the connection is interrupted. when the device has a Bluetooth starts blinking for up to 10 seconds. You hear The a decremental-pitched tone. The display shows
<Device Type> alternating with disconnected. If the Bluetooth device successfully re-connects before the Bluetooth 10 second Re-Connection Timer expires, the display shows momentary <Device Type> connected, and Bluetooth device fails to re-connect within 10 stops blinking, or if the seconds, the blinking is replaced by a persistent
. Standard Pairing Feature Note: Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk time power consumption, not the Standby time consumption. The Bluetooth Standard Pairing feature enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to search for other Bluetooth enabled and discoverable device. Once the device is discovered, you can initiate your radio to send a pairing request to pair with the device. This feature also enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to be visible to another Bluetooth enabled device and receive request to pair from other device. The Standard Pairing feature supports pairing Authentication Personal Pairing Number or PIN which ensure your radio recognizes the correct device to pair. The PIN must be exchanged with the radio or the device before the pairing completes. Your radio prompts for the Authentication PIN when needed. Refer to your devices manual for details about the Bluetooth Authentication PIN of your device if needed. Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device Ensure the Bluetooth on your device is turned to On and is set to Discoverable in order to enable your radio to detect your device in Bluetooth. Bluetooth Search in Bluetooth Standard Pairing method is used to scan for other Bluetooth devices nearby. It is set to off by default. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button . or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. and press the Menu Select button directly below On. to Search Devices or If successful, the display shows Searching for BT devices followed by the names of Bluetooth devices found, if any. When the search timer expires, Available Dev screen shows a list of Bluetooth devices found. To stop the search before the search timer expires, press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button or the Menu Select button below Stop. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the feature fails to initiate, the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The screen shows BT Search failed. Press the Menu Select button below Back to return to Bluetooth feature screen, or press Exit to return to Home screen. or the Menu Select button below 2 or to the device name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the device. The radio starts pairing to the device. To continue with Bluetooth pairing, please see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-
MPP) Feature on page 114. Turning Bluetooth Visibility On Turning Bluetooth visibility to on enables other Bluetooth devices to search for your radio. The visibility of the Bluetooth is set to off by default. The following methods are options on how to turn Bluetooth visibility on. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turn Bluetooth visibility on via radio menu BT:
117 English a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The status changes to Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn Bluetooth visibility on. Turn Bluetooth visibility on via the preprogrammed button. a) Press the preprogrammed button to enable the Bluetooth visibility feature. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. When the timer expires, the display shows momentary Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn Bluetooth visibility on. Note: Press the preprogrammed to toggle the Bluetooth visibility on or off. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English Receiving Pairing Request from other Devices When your radio receives a pairing request from other device, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair request. Press the Menu Select button below Ok to accept or Cncl to refuse pairing request. Turning Bluetooth Visibility Off Ensure that Bluetooth Visibility is turned on. The following methods are options on how to turn Bluetooth visibility off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. a) Turn Bluetooth visibility off via radio menu BT:
or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. b) or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Visibility Off. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn Bluetooth visibility off. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. To disable the Bluetooth visibility, press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visibility Off. Visibility mode is disabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn Bluetooth visibility off. PIN Authentication in Pairing For the security of your radio, Bluetooth Pairing PIN feature is designed to enable your radio to verify the correct device to pair before initiating the pairing. Authentic PIN is used for the verification. Note: The compare PIN authentication method is only applicable for Bluetooth version 2.1 and above. Pairing the Authentication PIN when Receiving a Pairing Request 1 When the radio display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair request, perform one of the following actions:
To accept, press the Menu Select button below Ok. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s To reject, press the Menu Select button below Cncl Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. When the pairing timer expires, the display shows
<Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. If you choose to accept the pairing process, the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If you choose to reject the pairing process, the display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. 119 English 2 Perform one of the following actions when the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX.:
Press the Menu Select button below Ok if the PIN is correct. Press the Menu Select button below Cncl to reject if the PIN number is incorrect. The display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. When the PIN authentication timer expires, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair canceled and return to Home screen. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress...., <Device Friendly Name>paired followed by <Device Friendly Name>connected. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:
The display shows <Device Friendly Name>
pair failed (if the pairing timer expires). t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English The display shows <Device Friendly Name>connect failed (if the connecting timer expires). If the PIN is correct but the profiles are not supported, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Home screen. Pairing the Authentication PIN with the Generated Numeric PIN Follow the procedure inSearching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device on page 117 to search for available Bluetooth devices. Start pairing with the Authentication PIN by following the steps described next. 1 or to the required device. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to initiate pairing. Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, PAN and SPP Bluetooth profiles. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress... followed by a randomly generated numeric PIN, Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If unsuccessful, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Available Dev screen. 2 Press Ok to continue pairing the radio and the device. The pairing process can be canceled by pressing the Menu Select button below Cncl. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress,<Device Friendly Name> paired, Connecting in progress... followed by
<Device Friendly Name>connected. The display returns to the Bluetooth feature screen. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:
The display shows <Device Friendly Name>
pair failed (if the PIN numbers are different).
<Device Friendly Name> connect failed
(if the connection fails). The display returns to Available Dev screen. Turning On the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Radio to the Headset) The following methods are options on how to turn on the Bluetooth audio. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning on the Bluetooth audio via radio menu BT:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows On. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning on the Bluetooth audio via the preprogrammed button:
a) To route the audio routing from the radio to the headset, short press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Headset on. 121 English Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio (Routing the Audio from the Headset to the Radio) Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device The following methods are options on how to turn off the Bluetooth Audio. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning off the Bluetooth audio via radio menu BT:
a) b) or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Off. c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth audio via the preprogrammed button:
a) To route the audio routing from the headset to the radio, press the preprogrammed button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Speaker on. Ensure that the Bluetooth audio device is connected to the radio. Your radio can only control the volume of MCW and OCW Bluetooth enabled audio device. If the radio is paired with other Bluetooth enabled audio device, its volume is independent from the APX radio. In this case, the volume is only adjustable on the device. Adjust volume up/down on the Bluetooth audio device. The radio display shows Volume XX, and you hear a short, medium-pitched tone. Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information 1 2 or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Devices. Once the display highlights the Devices, the display shows XX connected alternates with XX paired. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 If there are devices being paired or connected, along the list of <Device Friendly Name>
or to see the status of each device. If there are no active Bluetooth devices being paired or connected, the display shows No devices. 5 Perform one of the following actions:
To clear the device from the list, to the required device, press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. or To exit from this function, press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen without deleting the device name. If Clr is selected, the display shows <Device Friendly Name> clear?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes or No to proceed delete the device or to exit this function and return to previous screen.. If the device is deleted successfully, the display shows <Devlice Friendly Name> cleared to indicate clearing is successful. If the device is not deleted successfully, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Devlice Friendly Name> clear failed. The display returns to previous screen. Note: If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information The following methods are options on how to clear all Bluetooth devices information. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Clearing all Bluetooth devices information via the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button:
a) Long press the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. 123 English If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) Clearing all Bluetooth devices information via the radio menu Clr:
a) or to Devices and press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices?. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to proceed. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. Note: If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English Once a configuration upgrade is downloaded to your radio, you can install new changes immediately or delay changes to be installed on the radio when it is being powered up. Your radio can also be configured to allow you to accept or reject an upgrade. Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Responding to the Notification of Upgrade 1 The display shows Upgrade?. 2 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button below Acpt to accept the request to upgrade immediately. Press the Menu Select button below Dlay to delay the request to upgrade. Press the Menu Select button below Rej to reject the request to upgrade. One of the following scenarios occurs:
125 English Programming Over Project 25 (POP 25)
(ASTRO 25 and ASTRO Conventional) This feature enables configuration data to be upgraded to your radio over-the-air. This feature retains full use of the radio during the configuration data transfer without interrupting communication. The upgrade pauses to give priorities to voice call, and continues after the voice call ended. If you choose to accept, the display shows Upg Rx In Prog to indicate the upgrade received is in progress. If the upgrade is successful, the display shows Program done. If the upgrade fails, the display shows Program failed. The radio remains in current configuration. If you choose to delay, the radio prompts to upgrade in the next power up of your radio. If you choose to reject, the display shows Upg Aborted. The radio continues to function with the current configuration until it gets reprogrammed. Note: If your radio has problems upgrading over-the-
air, consult a qualified technician for details. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum duration of all different voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your agent if Voice Announcement is available for the feature you need. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:
High Enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone or channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button (which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note: Pressing this preprogrammed playback button will always enable the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel remaining within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s special situation that they need to be aware of. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Note: Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 127 English 4 5 The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 129 English 3 4 4 or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 1 or to SSA. 130 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. 3 4 The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. Utilities Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:
Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Emergency Call (Incoming Only) Note: The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The following methods are options on how to view recent calls. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing recent calls via the preprogrammed Recent Calls button:
a) Press the preprogrammed Recent Calls button. or to scroll through the list. b) c) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu or Select button directly below Exit, press the PTT button. Viewing recent calls via the radio menu:
131 English or to Rcnt. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. or c) d) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu to scroll through the list. Select button directly below Exit, PTT button. or the The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Using the Flip Display This feature allows you to flip the content of the top display upside down. It is particularly useful when you would like to read the top display while the radio is still in the carry holder attached to your belt. To flip the display, press and hold the preprogrammed Light/Flip button Selecting a Basic Zone Bank The Basic Zone Select feature must to be preprogrammed to the 3-position A-B-C switch, t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English while the Basic Zone Bank feature must be preprogrammed to any side button or Top (Orange) button before you can use this feature. This feature allows twice as many zones to be accessed from a switch, doubling the amount of switch positions. Use the preprogrammed Basic Zone Bank button to toggle the position between Bank 1 and Bank 2. The top display shows the status icons (A, B, C, D, E or F) or the zone name based on the bank and switch position selected. Note: See the Basic Zone Bank 1 and Basic Zone Bank 2 icons for more information on the status icons. Selecting an Enhanced Zone Bank This feature is created in order to allow users to communicate in more zones. An Enhanced Zone Bank (EZB) consists of three zones. This also means each icon A, B, C, ... or Y consist of three zones. You can use the preprogrammed 3-position A-B-C switch to select the first, second or third zone in an EZB. This feature allows user to navigate from up to 75 zones in 25 EZBs. Note: The Zone Select feature must to be preprogrammed to the 3-position A-B-C switch, while the Enhanced Zone Bank feature must be preprogrammed to any side button or Top (Orange) button before you can use this feature. 1 Press the preprogrammed EZB Up or EZB Down button to scroll the EZB up or down or press and hold the preprogrammed EZB Up or EZB Down button to fast scroll the EZB up or down. 2 Turn the 3-Position A/B/C Switch to select the first, second or third zone in the selected EZB. Selecting the Power Level Note: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. These reduced transmit power level settings do not affect the receiving performance of your radio, nor diminish the overall quality of the audio and data functionality of the radio given the following conditions. Power levelLow enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power levelHigh enables a longer transmitting distance. The following methods are options on how to select the power level. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting the Power Level via the Transmit Power Level switch:
a) Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level via the radio menu:
or to Pwr. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. 133 English Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note: The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. The following methods are options on how to select a radio profile. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile via the preprogrammed Profile button:
a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) to scroll through the menu selections. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below or Sel to select the required radio profile, or press t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Enabling and Disabling the Radio Alias This feature allows you to display or hide the radio alias (name). Press the Menu Select button directly below MyID. The display shows momentary Radio ID off, and the radio alias disappears from the Home screen or the display shows momentary Radio ID on, and the radio alias appears on the Home screen. Selecting the Audio Speaker Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to select the speaker route for the radio's audio from either the main or the secondary speaker using the radio profile settings. While both speakers function together with the secondary speaker enhancing intelligibility of the received audio during typical radio operation, each speaker has an independently-tuned frequency response and volume level operation. The secondary speaker also has a "whisper" mode with a modified volume taper for quieter modes of operation. Note: If an external speaker or microphone accessory is attached to the radio, neither internal speaker is operational as audio is routed to the accessory. The following methods are options on how to select the audio speaker. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Select the audio speaker via the preprogrammed Profile button:
a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) to scroll through the menu selections. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below or Sel to select the radio profile with the required speaker routing or press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the radio profile with the required speaker routing or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio's front display. 135 English Note: The backlight setting also affects the Menu Select buttons and Navigation button backlighting accordingly. The backlight remains on for a preprogrammed time before it automatically turns off completely or returns to the minimum backlight level. The preprogrammed Light/Flip button of the accessories connected to the radio such as Display Remote Speaker Microphone (DRSM) is disabled when the radio is in Night Vision Goggles (NVG) display mode. Perform one of the following actions:
To toggle the backlight on or off, press the preprogrammed Light/Flip button. To turn the backlight on, press either the Menu Select or Navigation button, or any programmable radio controls or buttons. Setting Up the Radio Display and Visual Indicators to Suit Night Vision Goggles During tactical nighttime operations of military entities worldwide, the Night Vision Goggles (NVG) is used to see in the dark. Your radio is 3rd generation NVG compatible. When the radio is in NVG display mode, t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English the radio's front display and top display emit a very low illumination backlight to allow the user to operate the radio with the goggles on. Caution: Remove your NVG if you operate the radio in non-NVG compatible display mode. Wearing the NVG to operate in non-
NVG compatible display mode might injure your eyes. Accessory connected to the radio that is in NVG display mode such as Display Remote Speaker Microphone (DRSM) has its backlight always in off state. Intelligent lighting indicators, TX LED and RX LED are all disabled on both the radio and the connected accessory when the radio is in NVG display mode. Note: Get familiar with your radio NVG feature and operation before you use it with your Night Vision Goggles. The following methods are options on how to set up the radio display and visual indicators. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. or to the designated NVG profile. Setting up the radio display and visual indicators via the preprogrammed Profile button:
a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) c) To select the required radio profile, press the Menu Select button directly below Sel or to exit the screen without making any changes, press the Menu Select button directly below Sel or to exit the screen without making any changes, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The radio returns to the Home screen with NVG display mode. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Locking and Unlocking the Controls Check with your dealer or qualified technician for best selection to suit your usage. 1 Toggle the preprogrammed Keypad/Control Lock button or switch to on. 2 The display shows Kypd/Ctrl Lock. 3 To unlock the knobs and buttons, toggle again. Turning the Controls and Buttons Tones On or Off You can enable and disable the tones of Navigation buttons and controls if needed. Turning the tones on or off via the preprogrammed Mute button:
a) To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Mute button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Turning the tones on or off via the radio menu:
or to Mute. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. The following methods are options on how to turn Voice Mute on or off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably 137 English depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Voice Mute on or off via the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:
a) To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off via the radio menu:
or to VMut. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. The display shows momentary Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 138 English The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note: You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Time and Date Setup You can set the time and date for your radio. Settings:
The default time setting is a 12-hour clock. The display shows 12:00AM. The AM/PM selection is not available for the 24-
hour clock setting. The default setting for the domestic date shows MDY. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for additional programmable settings for this feature. Editing the Time and Date 1 or to Clck. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Clck. The display shows the current setting of the radio. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The first item blinks. 4 Perform one of the following actions:
or to change the selected item. or one or more times to move to an item you wish to change. selected item. to change the or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes and return to the Home screen. 5 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok once you have finished to save your changes and return to the Home screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to discard all changes and return to the Home screen. at any time to return to the Home screen Press without saving your changes. Note: If a call arrives while the radio is in the clock-setting menu, the radio exits clock setting and displays the call information. Any changes made before the call is not saved. Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 139 English Analog Options Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available
(preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch Result You hear any digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 140 English Option Selective Switch Result You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch
(DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio will also unmute to any digital activity on a digital channel. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following scenarios occurs:
You hear any activity on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-
channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. The following table shows the variations of smart PTT:
A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Override Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit. IMPRES Battery Annunciator This feature displays the current capacity and charges cycles of your battery when an IMPRES 141 English Battery is powering your radio. This feature must be enabled in your radio to see the information. The information shown are:
Rated Capacity Remaining Capacity Estimated Charges Percentage of current battery capacity. Remaining power of the battery in mAh. Number of charges cycles the battery has gone through. Accessing the Battery Info screen 1 or to Batt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Batt. The display shows the details of the battery. 3 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:
Radio Information t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 142 English IP Display Control Assignments Soft ID (If enabled) Note: The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:
Host Version Secure Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version Option Board Type (optional) Option Board Bluetooth Address (optional) Expansion Board Type (optional) DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band Processor Version Option Board Serial Number (optional) Option Board Software Version (optional) Language Pack ID and Version (only when the language of the display is set to non-English) Note: To return to the Home screen, press time. at any 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Information screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:
or to scroll through the various information. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. To return to the Home screen, press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note: The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. APX 7000L radio has different list of information as shown in the following list. LOOPBACK device name Ite1 vpn1 iosu iosc 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the IP Info screen. 143 English 3 Perform one of the following actions:
3 Perform one of the following actions:
or to scroll through the various information. or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 28 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:
Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Control Map screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 144 English Helpful Tips Radio Care Caution:
Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Never poke this vent with any objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radios submergibility will be lost. A Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours. H e p l f u l i T p s Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio. Elastomer technology materials used for seals in rugged portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola recommends that rugged radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the watertight integrity of the radio. Motorola details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment needed to inspect, maintain and troubleshoot radio seals in the radios service manual. If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Otherwise, the water could short-circuit the radio. If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. 145 English Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician. Cleaning Your Radio Caution: Do not use solvents to clean your radio as most chemicals may permanently damage the radio housing and textures. Do not submerge the radio in the detergent solution. To clean the external surfaces of your radio, follow the procedure described next. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild dishwashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-
metallic, shortbristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. 3 Clean battery contacts with a lint-free cloth to remove dirt or grease. Proper Ways to Handle the Radio Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. Never carry the radio by the antenna. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Do not submerge the radio unless it is a ruggedized. Avoid subjecting the radio to corrosives, solvents or chemicals. Do not disassemble the radio. Keep the accessory-connector cover in place until ready to use the connector. Replace the cover immediately once the accessory has been disconnected. When charging the radio using a wall mounted charger, the radio must be turned off. Otherwise, the Man Down Alert and Emergency may be accidentally triggered. Radio Service and Repair Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating s p T i l u f p e H l 146 English condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for an additional period of either one or two years beyond the normal expiration date of the standard warranty. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center at 3761 South Central Avenue, Rockford, IL 61102 (800) 227-6772 / (847)725-4200. Battery Care Battery Charge Status H e p l f u l i T p s You can also check the battery charge status via the menu entry. See IMPRES Battery Annunciator on page 141 for more information. LED and Sounds When your battery is low:
the LED blinks red when the PTT button is pressed. you hear a low-battery chirp (short, high-pitched tone). Fuel Gauge Icons A blinking fuel gauge icon ( ) is displayed only when the battery voltage drops to low level. In this case, replace the battery with a fully charged one. Gauge Battery Charge 76% to 100% full*
Your radio can indicate the batterys charge status through:
the LED and sounds. the fuel gauge icon on the display. Top Display 147 English Gauge Battery Charge 51% to 75%*
Top Display Top Display Top Display 26% to 50%*
11% to 25%*
Battery Charge 10% or less (at 10%, the gauge begins blinking) Gauge Top Display
*These are for IMPRES battery operation only. Battery Recycling and Disposal In the U.S. and Canada, Motorola participates in the nationwide Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC) program for battery collection and recycling. Many retailers and dealers participate in this program. For the of the drop-off facility closest to you, access RBRC's Internet web site at www.rbrc.com or call 1-800-8-BATTERY. This internet site and telephone number also provide other useful information concerning recycling options for consumers, businesses, and governmental agencies. s p T i l u f p e H l 148 English Accessories The accessory link below is for APX radios. Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all APX models and/or bandsplits. Please refer to the specific APX radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Note: GPS only antenna is only used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/
transmit operation at UHF, VHF or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. A c c e s s o r i e s 149 English e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:
1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
bearing (state whether you are using true or latitude and longitude magnetic north) 150 English distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:
on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:
in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note:
Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Chan nel Numb er 1 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 Receive 160.550 2
*
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**
14 15**
16 17**
18 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850
-
160.950
-
156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 151 English 19 20
*
22
*
24 25 26 27 28 60
*
62 63
*
65 66 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.950 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 67**
68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**
78 79 80
*
*
*
84 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725
***
***
156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.025 157.125 157.175 157.225 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575
-
156.675 156.725
***
***
-
161.525 161.575 161.025 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 152 English 85 86 87 88 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 Note:
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.
** Low power (1 W) only
*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 153 English Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. ACK Active Channel Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 ASTRO Conventional Autoscan Bluetooth Acknowledgment of communication. A channel that has traffic on it. An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Bluetooth is an open wireless technology standard for exchanging data over short y r a s s o G l 154 English Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth pairing occurs when distances from fixed and mobile devices with high levels of security. two bluetooth devices exchanged a passkey to form a paired Bluetooth wireless connection. Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Call Alert Carrier Squelch Central Controller A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the Channel Control Channel Conventional Conventional Scan List COTS Digital Private Line (DPL) operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, twoway/
data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-
radio communications, sometimes through a repeater
(see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Commercial Off-The-Shelf A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping DSR EID ESN Failsoft An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Dynamic System Resilience Encrypted Integrated Data Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. l G o s s a r y 155 English FCC FM Hang Up Home screen IV&D KVL LCD LED Li-Ion Man Down Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Integrated Voice and Data Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display. Light-emitting diode. Lithium ion. A life-saving feature that senses the radio user may be in trouble by monitoring the whether the radio is in a vertical or horizontal position or whether the radio is motionless. When this feature is triggered, the radio alerts the MCW MDC Menu Entry Monitor user with audio and visual alerts. It can also trigger Emergency Alarm the Post-
Alert Timer is not cancelled. Mission Critical Wireless Motorola Data Communication A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the
,
, and buttons. Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. y r a s s o G l 156 English Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code NiMH Non-Tactical/
Revert OCW OTAR Page Personality PIN A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Nickel-metal-hydride. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Operation Critical Wireless Over-the-air rekeying. A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number Preprogrammed Private
(Conversation) Call Private Line (PL) Programmable PTT Radio Frequency
(RF) Refers to a software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit
(send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). l G o s s a r y 157 English A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-
transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. A feature that allows you to call a select individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. Synchronous Serial Interface Standby Status Calls Tactical/ Non-
Revert Talkaround Talkgroup TMS An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service Repeater Selective Call Selective Switch Squelch SSI y r a s s o G l 158 English Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard
(formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time;
everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =
Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. A grouping of channels. l G o s s a r y Zone 159 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
Other region:
Product Accessories One (1) Year ASTRO Portable Units Product Accessories Three (3) Years One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 148 English refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 149 English V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:
y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 150 English 1 any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2 the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 151 English VII. GOVERNING LAW:
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only:
This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/
Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 152 English
| 1 2 3 4 5 | C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 14.78 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7049 Date: April 20, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Class 2 Permissive Change to FCC Authorized Transceiver with FCC ID: AZ489FT7049 Dear Sir/Madam, A Class 2 permissive change is requested for the subject transceiver which is marketed in the United States and elsewhere. A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:
One (1) New Battery revisions were added into the radio family due to End of Life (EOL) of parts and design optimization purposes. Battery Kit No PMNN4491C B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:
SAR degradation is observed in EME compared to the original filing but still within the FCC limits. No EMC testing is required. C. CONCLUSION:
This radio continues to meet all FCC emissions requirements for which authorization was granted. However, SAR degradation is observed in EME compared to the original filing but still meet requirements of a Class-2 Permissive Change. Sincerely, Descriptions BATT IMPRES LIION IP68 2100T Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXHIBIT 13A Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia
| 1 2 3 4 5 | EME-PCII Test Report 1 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.01 MiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | EME-PCII Test Report 2 of 2 | RF Exposure Info | 2.02 MiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 |
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Frequency Justification Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 114.30 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7049 April 20, 2020 Authorization & Evaluation Division Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ489FT7049. Dear Sir/Madam:
This transmitter is designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:
Band/Mode 700 800 Bluetooth Frequency ranges 764-776 MHz, 793-806 MHz 806-824 MHz, 851-870 MHz 2402-2480 MHz FCC rule parts 90 90 15C To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts and 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Part 90 Federal Other Regions Frequency Range
(MHz) 764-768 768-769*
769-775 775-776*
794-798 798-799*
799-805 805-806*
806-809 809-824 824-825 851-854 854-869 869-870 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
*Canada Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13C
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 39.62 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 |
Certification Department Date: 17 April 2020 Subject: Application Authorization for FCC/IC filing To Whom It May Concern:
I hereby authorize Arine Lee to apply, on my behalf, the application for the following FCC/IC ID:
FCC/IC ID: AZ489FT7049 / 109U-89FT7049 Please contact me if there are any questions or issues. Regards, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager Tel: (954) 723 4707 Email: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ____________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc, 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Statement of Certification Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 441.46 KiB | April 22 2020 / April 23 2020 |
19/ IC: 109U-89F T7049 5ec 4) 1U-89F T7049) is in ISED RSS standards. 90.548 and RSS 119 to the samples tested 1 due to high volume EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 FCC ID: AZ489FT70-
EXHIBIT 2 statement of Certification to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100:
sed ~=herein (AZ489FT7049/10 ibie parts of the FCC rules and |
int as well which meets FCC Part exhibit 12. ported, or marketed will conform
| variations that can be expectex ement error. er Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc ttn
(Pursuant 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type descrit compliance with all applica This device is P25 Compliz Section 5.11 as declared in Each unit manufactured, in herein, within the statistice production and test measur NAME: Suhaifuddin Wahid SIGNATURE:
DATE: 16" April 2020 TITLE: Engineering Manag 19/ IC: 109U-89F T7049
) is compliant with the ay each transmitter qual to the transmit inal lations in this section ita (or information) on/hopping sequence 3 purpose of avoiding squencies by multiple EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2 FCC ID: AZ489FT70 uipment Class DSS Bluetooth mbedded Bluetooth device that id ISED RSS 247 regulations. 7 Section 5.1 ce must be pseudo random. t be used equally on the average |
t bandwidth is approximately e sequence with the transmitted sig Section 5.1 ned to comply with ail of the regu is presented with a continuous de Section 5.1 ot coordinate its channel selecti hopping systems for the expres:
cupancy of individual hopping fre Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc 2.2 Attestation Statement (Eq This device contains an e applicable FCC Part 15C ar Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 24 e The hopping sequen e Each frequency mus e The receivers input hima th WACAL INA INMALET e The receiver hops in Part 15.247 (g) / RSS 247 |
e The sysiem is desig when the transmitter Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 :
e The system does n with other frequency the simultaneous oc transmitters. NAME: Suhaifuddin Wahid SIGNATURE:
DATE: 16" April 2020 TITLE: Engineering Manage
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2020-04-23 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
| 2 | 851 ~ 870 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | ||
| 3 | 2014-11-03 | 851 ~ 869 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| 4 | 2011-11-10 | 851 ~ 870 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | Original Equipment |
| 5 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Effective |
2020-04-23
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
2014-11-03
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
2011-11-10
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003778479
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
8000 West Sunrise Blvd
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Ft Lauderdale
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Ft Lauderdale, FL
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Ft Lauderdale, Florida 33322
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
j******@acstestlab.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
B2: General Mobile Radio And Broadcast Services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 22 (non-cellular) 73, 74, 90, 95, 97, & 101 (all below 3 GHz)
|
|||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Grantee Code |
AZ4
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Product Code |
89FT7049
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
D**** Z********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Title |
Regulatory Compliance Manager
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
95472********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
--********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
d******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Portable 2-Way Radio | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | PORTABLE 2-WAY RADIO | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | BLUETOOTH TRANSMITTER | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Original Equipment | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Grant Comments | Power listed is Conducted. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance to FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Class II Change: Adds new battery kit to accessory portfolio. | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Power listed is rated conducted. Maximum conducted output power is 2.99W for 764-805MHz and 3.6W for 806-870MHz according to 90.205(s). This transmitter may operate with the antennas tested for this filing in Push-to-Talk and body-worn configurations. Body-worn SAR compliance is limited to the specific belt-clip and accessory configurations tested for in this filing and which provide at least a 1.0 cm separation between the device and the users body. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. All qualified end-users of this device must have the knowledge to control their exposure conditions and/or duration to comply with Occupational /Controlled SAR limit and requirements. A label, as described in this filing, must be displayed on the device to direct users to specific training information for meeting Occupational Exposure Requirements and users must be provided with the training information. The highest reported SAR values for head and body-worn accessory are 2.26 W/kg and 5.82 W/kg respectively accounting for a 50% duty-cycle. Class II Change: Adds new battery kit to accessory portfolio. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Power listed is rated conducted. Maximum conducted output power is 2.99W for 764-805MHz and 3.6W for 806-870MHz according to 90.205(s). This transmitter may operate with the antennas tested for this filing in Push-to-Talk and body-worn configurations. Body-worn SAR compliance is limited to the specific belt-clip and accessory configurations tested for in this filing and which provide at least a 1.0 cm separation between the device and the users body. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. All qualified end-users of this device must have the knowledge to control their exposure conditions and/or duration to comply with Occupational /Controlled SAR limit and requirements. A label, as described in this filing, must be displayed on the device to direct users to specific training information for meeting Occupational Exposure Requirements and users must be provided with the training information. The highest reported SAR values for head and body-worn accessory are 2.91 W/kg and 4.83 W/kg respectively accounting for a 50% duty-cycle. Class II Change to add new models as described in this filing. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Power listed is rated conducted. Maximum conducted output power is 2.99W for 764-805MHz and 3.6W for 806-870MHz according to 90.205(s). This transmitter may operate with the antennas tested for this filing in Push-to-Talk and body-worn configurations. Body-worn SAR compliance is limited to the specific belt-clip and accessory configurations tested for in this filing and which provide at least a 1.0 cm separation between the device and the users body. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. All qualified end-users of this device must have the knowledge to control their exposure conditions and/or duration to comply with Occupational /Controlled SAR limit and requirements. A label, as described in this filing, must be displayed on the device to direct users to specific training information for meeting Occupational Exposure Requirements and users must be provided with the training information. The highest reported SAR values for head and body-worn accessory are 2.91 W/kg and 4.83 W/kg respectively accounting for a 50% duty-cycle. Note 1: 11K0F3E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1W, 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Power listed is Conducted. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance to FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
Motorola Penang Advanced Communication Laboratory
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
Motorola
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
H**** H******
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
S**** H****
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
W******** E****
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
604-2********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
60485******** Extension:
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
954-7********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
604 6********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
604-6********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
954-7********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
h******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
c******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 |
F******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0100000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 9 | BE EF | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 2 | 9 | BE EF | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 3 | 9 | BE EF | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 4 | 9 | BE EF | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 5 | 9 | BE EF | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 6 | 9 | BE EF | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 20K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 7 | 9 | BE EF | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 8 | 9 | BE EF | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 9 | 9 | BE EF | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 9 | BE EF | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 11 | 9 | BE EF | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 12 | 9 | BE EF | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 20K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 13 | 9 | BE EF | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 14 | 9 | BE EF | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 15 | 9 | BE EF | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 16 | 9 | BE EF | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 17 | 9 | BE EF | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 18 | 9 | BE EF | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 20K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 19 | 9 | BE EF | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 2 | 9 | BE EF | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 21 | 9 | BE EF | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 22 | 9 | BE EF | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 23 | 9 | BE EF | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 24 | 9 | BE EF | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 20K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 2 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 3 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 4 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 5 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 6 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 7 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 8 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 9 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 11 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 12 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 13 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 14 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 20K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 15 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 16 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 17 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 18 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 8K10F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 19 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 2 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | 20K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 1 | 9 | 764 | 775 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | NOTE 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 2 | 9 | 793 | 805 | 2.65 | 1.5 ppm | NOTE 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 3 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | NOTE 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 4 | 9 | 851 | 870 | 3.3 | 1.5 ppm | NOTE 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0100000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC